TK No.

0403E
DZ-MV580A
SERVICE MANUAL DZ-MV580A(K)
DZ-MV550A
DZ-MV550A(K)
PWB part numbers added 07/16/04

MultiMediaCard TM

DO NOT RESELL OR DIVERT IMPROPERLY

SPECIFICATIONS AND PARTS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE FOR IMPROVEMENT

DVD VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDER

March 2004 Digital Media Division,Tokai
Version 0403E.01
 Table of Contents
1 Safety Precaution for Repair ............. 1-1
1-1 Cautions ................................................... 1-1
1-2 Electrostatic Protection Measures ............ 1-2
1-3 Cautions When Handling DVD Drive ......... 1-2
1-4 Lead-Free Solder ...................................... 1-3
1-5 Notes When Using Service Manual .......... 1-5
2 General Description ........................... 2-1
2-1 Overview .................................................. 2-1
2-1-1 Servicing method ................................... 2-1
2-2 Features ................................................... 2-2
2-3 Specifications ........................................... 2-2
2-4 Major Differences from
Previous Models ....................................... 2-5
2-5 Compatibility of Recorded Discs ............... 2-7
2-6 Names of Parts ......................................... 2-8
2-7 List of Abbreviations and Terms for
DVD Video Camera/Recorders ................. 2-10
3 Description of Operation ................... 3-1
3-1 Description of Structure ............................ 3-1
3-2 Description of Newly Adopted
Technology ............................................... 3-2
4 Troubleshooting.................................. 4-1
4-1 Procedure for Troubleshooting .................. 4-1
4-2 System Resetting/Resetting
Camera Functions .................................... 4-2
4-2-1 List of items to be reset ......................... 4-2
4-2-2 System reset procedure ........................ 4-4
4-2-3 Procedure for resetting
camera functions ................................... 4-4
4-3 Problem Guide .......................................... 4-5
4-4 Messages and Troubleshooting ................ 4-12
4-5 Self-Diagnosis Function and
Troubleshooting ........................................ 4-22
4-5-1 Message displayed by
self-diagnosis function ........................... 4-22
4-5-2 Error codes stored in flash memory ....... 4-24
4-5-3 Major error codes and
troubleshooting ...................................... 4-25
i
4-6 Checking Versions of Firmware and
Updating ................................................... 4-27
4-6-1 Checking firmware versions ................... 4-27
4-6-2 Updating firmware ................................. 4-28
4-7 Trouble Diagnosis ..................................... 4-30
4-7-1 Trouble diagnosis table .......................... 4-30
4-7-2 Disassembly/reassembly for enable
service position ..................................... 4-35
4-8 Procedure for Removing Disc from
Faulty DZ-MV580A/MV550A ..................... 4-41
4-8-1 Item to be checked ................................ 4-41
4-8-2 How to remove disc ............................... 4-41
4-9 Special Functions ..................................... 4-42
4-9-1 Forced formatting of DVD-RAM disc ...... 4-42
4-9-2 EEPROM data backup and write ........... 4-43
5 Disassembly and Reassembly .......... 5-1
5-1 Items to Be Checked ................................ 5-1
5-2 Order of Disassembly ............................... 5-1
5-3 Disassembly ............................................. 5-3
(1) Adjustment Cover .................................. 5-3
(2) Hood, Filter Piece and Lens Cove ......... 5-3
(3) SAF-H/SAF Circuit Board and L Block ... 5-4
(4) Front Block and R Block ........................ 5-5
(5) Jack Cover ............................................ 5-5
(6) FRT-H/FRT Circuit Board, Microphone,
and Microphone Cover .......................... 5-5
(7) SWL3-H/SWL3 Circuit Board ................. 5-6
(8) Side Case-L, LCD unit, and
SWL2 Circuit Board ............................... 5-7
(9) LCD Case-U, MR Circuit Board,
and Fulcrum Block ................................. 5-8
(10) Disc Cover ............................................. 5-9
(11) USB Holder, USB-H/USB Circuit Board,
Rear Cover, EVF Unit,
and Hand Strap ..................................... 5-10
(12) SHE-H/SHE Circuit Board and Accessory
Shoe in DZ-MV580A .............................. 5-11
(13) SHE Circuit Board in DZ-MV550A ......... 5-11
(14) Accessory Shoe in DZ-MV550A ............ 5-11
(15) AEL-H/AEL and MAN-H/MAM Circuit
Boards ................................................... 5-12
(16) Camera Block ........................................ 5-13
 (17) Link Bracket ........................................... 5-13
(18) Drive Block and Side Case-R ................ 5-14
(19) Loader, DRF-H/DRF Circuit Board,
Disc Drive Unit, Lock Unit, and Frame ... 5-15
(20) Fulcrum Cover-U, Fulcrum Cover-B,
and Fulcrum Unit ................................... 5-16
(21) LCD Case-B and LCD Circuit Board ...... 5-16
(22) GYR-H Circuit Board, Lens Frame , Lens
Unit Cushion, Crystal Filter, CCD Image
Sensor, and SEN-H Circuit Board in
DZ-MV580A .......................................... 5-17
(23) GYR Circuit Board, Lens Frame, and
Lens Unit in DZ-MV550A ....................... 5-18
6 Adjustment .......................................... 6-1
6-1 Creating Reference Data .......................... 6-1
6-1-1 List of Jigs and Tools used when Creating
Reference Data ..................................... 6-2
6-1-2 Power Supply and Materials for Creating
Reference Data ..................................... 6-3
6-1-3 Connections when Creating
Reference Data ..................................... 6-3
6-1-4 Settings when Creating
Reference Data ..................................... 6-5
6-1-5 Copy or Deleting Adjustment Program ... 6-6
6-1-6 Starting and Terminating Reference
Data Creation Program .......................... 6-6
6-1-7 Creating Reference Data ....................... 6-9
6-2 Setups for Adjustment .............................. 6-11
6-2-1 Checking Reference Data ...................... 6-11
6-2-2 List of Jigs and Tools for Adjustment ...... 6-11
6-2-3 Test Equipment, Power Supply and
Charts for Adjustment ............................ 6-12
6-2-4 Connections for Adjustment ................... 6-12
6-2-5 Settings for Adjustment .......................... 6-14
6-2-6 Starting and Terminating Adjustment
Program ................................................ 6-16
6-3 List of Adjustment Items ........................... 6-18
6-3-1 Adjustment Program
Hierarchy Diagram ................................. 6-18
6-3-2 List of Adjustments Needed After
Replacing Major Components ............... 6-19
6-3-3 Purpose of Adjustments and
Incompleted Phenomenon ..................... 6-21
ii
6-4 Adjustment Procedure .............................. 6-22
6-4-1 Initial Data Write .................................... 6-22
6-4-2 Video Level ............................................ 6-23
6-4-3 Burst Level ............................................ 6-24
6-4-4 Sampling Pulse ..................................... 6-25
6-4-5 Autofocus .............................................. 6-26
6-4-6 Auto Iris Control ..................................... 6-27
6-4-7 Matrix .................................................... 6-28
6-4-8 Chroma Gain ......................................... 6-29
6-4-9 Spot Noise .............................................. 6-31
6-4-11 LCD ...................................................... 6-32
6-4-12 EVF ...................................................... 6-39
7 Exploded View and Parts List ............ 7-1
7-1 Exploded Views ........................................ 7-1
7-1-1 L Block and Front Block ......................... 7-1
7-1-2 R Block .................................................. 7-2
7-1-3 LCD Unit ................................................ 7-3
7-1-4 DZ-MV580A Camera Block ................... 7-3
7-1-5 DZ-MV550A Camera Block ................... 7-3
7-2 Replacement Parts List ............................ 7-4
7-2-1 Mechanical parts list .............................. 7-4
7-2-2 Electrical parts list ................................. 7-5
S Schematic & Wiring Diagrams ........... S-1
S-1 DZ-MV580A Wiring Diagram ................. S-1
S-2 DZ-MV550A Wiring Diagram ................. S-2
S-3 GYR-H/GYR .......................................... S-3
S-4 FRT-H/FRT ............................................ S-3
S-5 DRF-H/DRF ........................................... S-4
S-6 SWL3-H/SWL3 ...................................... S-4
S-7 SHE-H ................................................... S-5
S-8 SHE ....................................................... S-5
S-9 USB-H/USB ........................................... S-6
S-10 SAF-H/SAF ........................................... S-6
S-11 MR ........................................................ S-6
S-12 LCD ....................................................... S-7
S-13 SEN-H ................................................... S-8
S-14 BTB [AEL-H/AEL] .................................. S-9
S-15 LENS DRIVE [AEL-H/AEL] .................... S-10
S-16 AUD [AEL-H/AEL] .................................. S-11
S-17 EVF [AEL-H/AEL] .................................. S-12
S-18 SWL2 .................................................... S-13
S-19 IC BLOCK ............................................. S-14
C Circuit Board Diagrams ..................... C-1 B Block Diagrams .................................. B-1
C-1 GYR-H ................................................... C-1 B-1 Video/Audio Signal Process .................. B-1
C-2 GYR ...................................................... C-1 B-2 Disc Drive .............................................. B-2
C-3 FRT-H .................................................... C-2 B-3 Power-1 ................................................. B-3
C-4 FRT ....................................................... C-2 B-4 Power-2 ................................................. B-4
C-5 DRF-H/DRF ........................................... C-3
Information of MAN-H/MAN, DRV-R, MOD
C-6 SHE ....................................................... C-3
and HDM Circuit Boards
C-7 SHE-H ................................................... C-4
During servicing, replace the entire MAN-H/
C-8 SWL3-H/SWL3/SWL2 ........................... C-4
MAN circuit board, and the entire disc drive
C-9 USB-H/USB ........................................... C-5
unit, including the DRV-R, MOD and HDM
C-10 MR ........................................................ C-5
circuit boards.
C-11 LCD ....................................................... C-6
Because of this servicing method, this service
C-12 SEN-H ................................................... C-7
manual includes only the simplified circuit
C-13 SAF-H/SAF ........................................... C-7
board diagrams, and does not include any
C-14 AEL-H/AEL ............................................ C-8
schematic circuit diagrams.
C-15 MAN-H/MAN ......................................... C-9
The simplified circuit board diagrams show the
C-16 DRV-R ................................................... C-10
major voltage values: Refer to them during
C-17 HDM ...................................................... C-11
troubleshooting.

iii
 1 Safety Precaution for Repair
1-1 Cautions
PRODUCT SAFETY NOTICE
Many electrical and mechanical parts have special safety-related characteristics. These are often not
evident from visual inspection nor can the protection afforded by them necessarily be obtained by using
replacement components rated for a higher voltage, wattage, etc. Replacement parts which have these
special safety characteristics are identified in this Service Manual. Electrical components having such
features are identified by marking with a on the schematics and the parts list in this Service Manual.
The use of a substitute replacement component which does not have the same safety characteristics as
the HITACHI recommended replacement one, shown in the parts list in this Service Manual, may create
shock, fire, or other hazards. Product safety is continuously under review and new instructions are issued
from time to time. For the latest information, always consult the current HITACHI Service Manual. A
subscription to, or additional copies for, HITACHI Service Manual may be obtained at a nominal charge
from HITACHI SALES CORPORATION.

CAUTION CLASS 2M LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN

DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEEM OR VIEW
DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS.

CAUTION
CLASS 1
LASER PROCTECT
There is a high-voltage section inside the DVD video
camera/recorder: When repairing or inspecting it, take
CAUTION great care to prevent electric shock: Use an isolating
This product contains a laser diode of
transformer, wear gloves, etc.
higher class than 1. To ensure contin-
ued safety, do not remove any covers
or attempt to gain access to the in-
side of the product. Refer all servicing
to qualified personnel.

1-1
 Safety Precaution for Repair > Electrostatic Protection Measures / Cautions When Handling DVD Drive

1-2 Electrostatic Protection Measures

Semiconductor components can be damaged by static electricity charged on clothes, human body,
etc. Take great care when handling components to avoid electrostatic damage, and perform
servicing in an environment where grounding is complete.

(1) Grounding work bench (Fig. 1-2-1)

Lay out an antistatic mat on work bench, and then use the ground plate to ground the work bench.
(2) Grounding human body (Fig. 1-2-2)
Use an antistatic wrist strap to discharge any static electricity charged on the body. Also, use a
tester for wrist strap to make sure that the wrist strap is working normally. Note, however, that
static electricity charged on clothes will not be discharged by wrist strap: Therefore do not allow
your clothes to touch the semiconductor components.

Antistatic mat

1M ohm 1M ohm
Antistatic wrist strap
Ground

Fig. 1-2-1 Grounding Work Bench Fig. 1-2-2 Grounding Human Body

1-3 Cautions When Handling DVD Drive

The optical pickup in DVD drive has a high precision structure: Be sure to observe the following
cautions.
1) Do not subject optical pickups to any severe vibrations or impact during movement, installation
or disassembly.
2) When performing repair work, do not perform disassembly any further than that described in
this manual.
3) Never turn the semi-variable resistors for adjustment in optical pickup or DVD drive.
4) NEVER look into the objective lens in optical pickup or directly view the laser light: You could
lose your eyesight.

Do not directly look at laser light

from pickup.
Fig. 1-3-1 Cautions on Optical Pickup
1-2
 Safety Precaution for Repair > Lead-Free Solder

1-4 Lead-Free Solder

The printed circuit board that uses lead-free solder is adopted. To protect the global environment,
use the recommended lead-free solder also during servicing.
Read and observe the following before soldering:

Caution
ALWAYS wear protective goggles during soldering so that no solder smoke or scattered solder
enters the eye. Lead-free solder may scatter at high temperatures of 600°C.

(1) Identification of circuit boards that use lead-free solder

“F” is stamped or noted with pattern letter on circuit boards that use lead-free solder.
(2) Characteristics of lead-free solder
The components of lead-free solder used are as follows. The melting point of lead-free solder is 30-
40°C higher than that of lead based solder:

Point to be soldered Composition of alloy (wt%)

For reflow Solder paste: Sn-3Ag-0.5Cu
For dip Bar solder: Sn-0.6Cu Melting temperature: Approx. 220°C

(3) Lead-free solder for servicing

Use the following lead-free solder for servicing:
Recommended lead-free solder and composition of alloy (wt%): Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu or equivalent

Information:
For composition of alloy, Sn is tin; Ag is silver; Cu is copper; Bi is bismuth; Pb is lead.

(4) Soldering iron for servicing

The temperature of soldering iron tip must be adjusted according to the points to be soldered: Use
an antistatic soldering iron with thermal control function.
When removing components, take care not to damage any surrounding component or pattern. When
attaching components, observe the heating time in the following table so that the components are
not destroyed by heat.

Tip temperatures for different soldering points:

Point to be soldered Tip temperature
Surface-mounted (chip) parts [other than 320 ± 30°C
those shown below] [heating time: less than 5 seconds]
Surface-mounted (chip) parts [for DVD 350 ± 10°C
cameras, cellular phones only] [heating time: less than 3 seconds]
Discrete parts 380 ± 30°C
Chassis, metal shield, etc. 420 ± 30°C

1-3
 Safety Precaution for Repair > Lead-Free Solder

(5) Cautions when using lead based solder

It is recommended that you use lead-free solder when servicing, but it is also possible to service
using lead based solder. However, if lead based solder is used for servicing, take care with the
following:
1) Before using lead based solder, remove the lead-free solder completely from the point to be
soldered.
2) For additional soldering for repair, set the soldering iron tip temperature for lead-free solder, mix
lead based solder and lead-free solder sufficiently. Do not perform any repair using the bare
soldering iron tip without adding solder, since it will cause secondary failure due to lack of
strength.

1-4
 Safety Precaution for Repair > Notes When Using Service Manual

1-5 Notes When Using Service Manual

(1) Value units used in parts list
Certain symbols are indicated as shown below for value units of resistors, capacitors and coils in
parts list. When you read them, note the following regular indications:

Parts Indication in list Regular indication

Resistor KOHM ......................................... k
Capacitor UF ................................................ µF
PF ................................................ pF
Coil UH ............................................... µH
MH .............................................. mH

(2) Values in schematic diagrams

The values, dielectric strength (power capacitance) and tolerances of the resistors (excluding
variable resistors) and capacitors are indicated in the schematic diagrams using abbreviations.
Certain symbols are indicated for value units: When you read them note the regular indications in
tables below:
[Resistors] [Capacitors]
Item Indication Item Indication
Value No indication .............................. Value No indication .............................. µF
K .................................................. k P .................................................. pF
M ................................................. M Dielectric No indication .............................. 50V
Tolerance No indication .............................. ±5% strength (All dielectric strengths other than
(All tolerances other than ±5% are 50 V are indicated in schematic
indicated in schematic diagrams) diagrams)
Power No indication .............................. 1/8W
[Coils]
capacitance (1/16 W for leadless resistors with no
indication) Item Indication
All capacitances other than the above Value µ ................................................... µH
are indicated in schematic diagrams. m .................................................. mH

(3) Identifications of sides A/B in circuit board diagrams

1) Board with a pattern on one side and parts on both sides:
Side A: Shows discrete parts, viewed from the pattern side.
Side B: Shows leadless parts, viewed from the pattern side.
2) Board with patterns on both sides and parts on both sides:
Side A: Shows parts and patterns which can be seen when the case is opened.
Side B: Shows parts and the pattern on the back of side A.

1-5
 Safety Precaution for Repair > Notes When Using Service Manual

(4) Table for indexing locations of parts

This table shows locations of each part on circuit board diagrams. The locations are indicated using
the guide scales on the external lines of diagrams.

1) One diagram indicated for each board 2) Two diagrams indicated for each board

Symbol Parts Symbol Parts

No. Location No. Location
IC Type of part IC
IC1201 2 A IC1201 A - 2 A

Zone "A" on circuit board Zone "A" on board

Symbol no. diagram diagram
Zone "2" on circuit board Zone "2" on board
diagram diagram

A: Shows side A
B: Shows side B

1-6
 2 General Description
2-1 Overview
The DZ-MV580A DVD video camera/recorder has been made more compact than the previous DZ-
MV380A; the DZ-MV550A has been made compact than the DZ-MV350A.
The DZ-MV580A has a CCD image sensor with a total of 1,020,000 pixels and a high-performance
optical 10-power zoom.
The DZ-MV550A has a CCD image sensor with a total of 680,000 pixels and an optical 18-power
zoom.

2-1-1 Servicing method

Refer to the following table and perform the designated, appropriate servicing. Any changes that
occur in the service method will be published using service bulletin, etc.
Do not perform any servicing other than that described in this manual.

Parts Name Servicing method

DISC DRIVE FRT-H/FRT
Disc drive unit Unit replacement. UNIT CIRCUIT
Which incorporates the BOARD
MR CIRCUIT BOARD
DRV-R, MOD and HDM (In the LCD unit)
circuit boards.
Lens unit Unit replacement.
AEL-H/AEL circuit Component replacement.
board(*1)
DRF-H/DRF circuit Component replacement.
board(*1)(*2)
FRT-H/FRT circuit Component replacement. GYR-H/GYR
CIRCUIT
board(*1) SEN-H BOARD SHE-H/SHE
GYR-H/GYR circuit Component replacement. LENS CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
board(*1) UNIT BOARD BOARD SWL3-H/SWL3
CIRCUIT
LCD circuit board Component replacement. BOARD
LCD
MAN-H/MAN circuit Circuit board assembly CIRCUIT DRF-H/DRF
BOARD CIRCUIT
board(*1) replacement. BOARD
MR circuit board(*3) Component replacement.
MAN-H/MAN
SAF-H/SAF circuit Component replacement. CIRCUIT
board(*1)(*4) BOARD
SEN-H circuit board Component replacement.
AEL-H/AEL SAF-H/SAF
(*1)(*5)
CIRCUIT USB-H/USB CIRCUIT
SHE-H/SHE circuit Component replacement. BOARD CIRCUIT BOARD
BOARD
board(*1) SWL2
CIRCUIT
SWL2 circuit board Component replacement. BOARD
SWL3 circuit board Component replacement.
USB/USB-H circuit Component replacement. Fig. 2-1-1
board(*1)
*1: The board names suffixed with “-H” are for DZ-MV580A only.
*2: Film type board that connects MAN-H/MAN circuit board and disc drive unit.
*3: Film type board in LCD unit
*4: Film type board that connects AEL-H/AEL circuit board and SWL2 circuit board.
*5: Applicable only to DZ-MV580A. Although the SEN-H circuit board and lens unit in DZ-MV580A are
assigned as different boards, the circuit board in DZ-MV550A that corresponds to SEN-H is assembled
in the lens unit.

2-1
 General Description > Features / Specifications

2-2 Features QUICK MODE SWITCH

QUICK MODE switch mounted
The new DVD video camera/recorder has a QUICK MODE switch
that switches the on-screen display between Quick mode and
Normal mode: The new timer of video camera/recorder can easily
operate the screen display in Quick mode.
The Quick mode displays only the fundamental menu items; a
brief explanation of the selected item is displayed across the
bottom of screen.

Fig. 2-2-1

2-3 Specifications
Item Specifications
CCD Image Sensor DZ-MV580A 1/3.8-inch interlaced
DZ-MV550A 1/6-inch interlaced
Total number of DZ-MV580A Approx. 1,020,000
pixels DZ-MV550A Approx. 680,000
Number of DZ-MV580A Video: Approx. 400,000
effective pixels: (Approx. 530,000 when 16:9 is set)
Photo: Approx. 960,000
DZ-MV550A Video: Approx. 340,000
Photo: Approx. 340,000
Lens DZ-MV580A F1.8 - 2.4, f = 3/16” - 1-1/2” (3.8 - 38 mm)
DZ-MV550A F1.8 - 2.8, f = 1/16” - 1-1/2” (2.1 - 37.8 mm)
Filter diameter / Thread pitch: 1-7/16” (37 mm) / 0.75mm
Focus Auto/Manual
Zoom DZ-MV580A Optical 10×, 240× with digital zoom added (40× for
photo)
DZ-MV550A Optical 18×, 500× with digital zoom added (40× for
photo)
Required minimum illumination 0.3 lx (When Low Light mode is selected)
Viewfinder 0.33-inch color TFT (approx. 110,000 pixels)
LCD monitor 2.5-inch color TFT (approx. 120,000 pixels)
Image Stabilizer Electronic Type
Shutter speed 1/60 - 1/4000 second (video)
Self-timer recording Photo recording only
External microphone jack Ø 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack
(a plug-in power type microphone cannot be used)
Recording mode Video with audio (DVD-RAM disc, DVD-R disc)
Photo (DVD-RAM disc, SD memory card,
MultiMediaCard)
Maximum DVD-RAM disc (per side) XTRA mode: Approx. 18 min.
time of FINE mode: Approx. 30 min.
recordable STD mode: Approx. 60 min.
video DVD-R disc (per side) FINE mode: Approx. 30 min.
STD mode: Approx. 60 min.
LPCM mode: Approx. 30 min.
2-2
 General Description > Specifications

Item Specifications
Maximum DVD-RAM disc (per side) 999 However, if video and photo are mixed on one disc,
number of the recordable number will decrease
recordable SD memory DZ-MV580A Approx. 50 (in FINE mode) Varies depending on the
photos Card recording quality and the type of card
(When using DZ-MV550A Approx. 220 (in FINE mode) Varies depending on the
32MB card) recording quality and the type of card
Recording DVD-RAM disc Video: Conforming to DVD video recording
format (DVD-VR) format
Audio: MPEG Audio layer 2
Photo: Simultaneous recording, conforming to JPEG
format (DZ-MV580A: 1280 × 960 pixels, DZ-
MV550A: 640 × 480 pixels) and DVD video
recording (DVD-VR) format (704 × 480 pixels).
[JPEG of external input: 640 × 480 pixels]
DVD-R disc Video: Conforming to DVD video format
Audio: MPEG Audio layer 2 or LPCM*1
Card Photo: Conforming to JPEG (DZ-MV580A: 1280 × 960
pixels, DZ-MV550A: 640 × 480 pixels) format
[External input: 640 × 480 pixels]
Audio playback format MPEG Audio layer 2, LPCM, Dolby AC3
Recording media 8 cm DVD-RAM disc (conforming to DVD-RAM Ver. 2.1)
8 cm DVD-R disc
(conforming to DVD-R for General Ver. 2.0)
SD memory card
MultiMediaCard
Jacks Video/audio input/output × 1
External microphone input × 1
PC connection terminal (connected to PC USB port) × 1
Battery system Lithium-ion
Power consumption (when DZ-MV580A Approx. 4.4 W (DVD-RAM disc used, FINE mode)
recording with LCD monitor off ) DZ-MV550A Approx. 4.1 W (DVD-RAM disc used, FINE mode)
Dimensions (W × H × D, excluding projections) Approx. 2-1/2” × 3-1/2” × 5-3/4” (64 × 89 × 146 mm)
Operating temperature (humidity) 32-104°F (0-40°C) (less than 80%)
32-86°F (0-30°C) when connected to PC
Storage temperature -4 - 104°F (-20 - 60°C)
Weight (without battery and DZ-MV580A Approx. 500 g
disc) DZ-MV550A Approx. 490 g
Total weight when recording DZ-MV580A Approx. 585 g
(when using DZ-BP14S battery) DZ-MV550A Approx. 575 g

2-3
 General Description > Specifications

Item Specifications
Provided accessories AC adapter/charger (model DZ-ACS1)
Power cable
DC power cord,
Battery (model DZ-BP14S)
AV/S input/output cable
Infrared remote control (model DZ-RM3W)
Lithium battery for remote control (model CR2025)
Lens cap
Lens cap string
Shoulder strap
Software CD-ROM
PC connection cable
Single-sided 8cm DVD-RAM disc (in round DVD holder)
*1: The DZ-MV580A/MV550A records audio on DVD-R disc using the MPEG Audio layer 2 format in FINE
or STD mode, and using the LPCM format in LPCM mode.
The MPEG Audio layer 2 format is an option of DVD video standard. Record a DVD-R disc in LPCM
mode to play it back on a DVD player that does not comply with this option standard.
Specifications are subject to change without notice for the purpose of improvement.

Specifications of DZ-ACS1 AC Adapter/Charger

Power supply 100 - 240 V AC,
50/60 Hz
Input capacity 26 VA (at 100 V)
DC output (max.) 7.9 V, 1.4 A
Charge output 8.4 V, 0.65A
Weight 105 g
External dimensions 61 × 32 × 91 mm
(W x H x D)
Ambient temperature for 32 - 104°F (5 - 35°C)
operation
Allowable relative 40 - 80%
humidity

2-4
 General Description > Major Differences from Previous Models

2-4 Major Differences from Previous Models

: Same as on left
Item DZ-MV580A/MV550A DZ-MV380A/MV350A
CCD DZ-MV580A: 1/3.8-inch interlaced DZ-MV380A:
DZ-MV550A: 1/6-inch interlaced DZ-MV350A: 1/4-inch interlaced
Total number DZ-MV580A: DZ-MV380A:
of pixels Approx. 1,020,000 pixels
DZ-MV550A: DZ-MV350A:
Approx. 680,000 pixels
Number of DZ-MV580A: DZ-MV380A:
effective pixels Video: Approx. 400,000 pixels Video: Approx. 400,000 pixels
(Approx. 530,000 when Photo: Approx. 960,000 pixels
16:9 is set)
Photo: Approx. 960,000 pixels
DZ-MV550A: DZ-MV350A:
Video: Approx. 340,000
Photo: Approx. 340,000
Lens DZ-MV580A: DZ-MV380A:
F1.8 - 2.4
f = 3/16” - 1-1/2” (3.8 - 38 mm)
DZ-MV550A: DZ-MV350A:
F1.8 - 2.8 F1.8 - 2.5
f = 1/16” - 1-1/2” (2.1 - 37.8 mm) f = 1/8” - 1-1/4” (3.15 - 31.5 mm)
Zoom DZ-MV580A: DZ-MV380A:
Optical 10×, 240× with digital zoom
added (40× for photo)
DZ-MV550A: DZ-MV350A:
Optical 18×, 500× with digital zoom Optical 10×, 240× with digital zoom
added (40× for photo) added (40× for photo)
Filter diameter 1-7/16” (37 mm) DZ-MV380A: 1-7/16” (37 mm)
DZ-MV350A: 1-3/16” (30.5 mm)
Required minimum 0.3 lx
illumination (When Low Light mode is selected)
Viewfinder 0.33-inch color TFT 0.44-inch color TFT
(approx. 110,000 pixels) (approx. 110,000 pixels)
LCD monitor 2.5-inch color TFT
(approx. 120,000 pixels)
Power consumption DZ-MV580A: Approx. 4.4 W DZ-MV380A: Approx. 5.0 W
DZ-MV550A: Approx. 4.1 W DZ-MV350A: Approx. 4.7 W
Weight DZ-MV580A: Approx. 500 g DZ-MV380A: Approx. 505 g
DZ-MV550A: Approx. 490 g DZ-MV350A: Approx. 480 g
Accessory Shoe DZ-MV580A: Power/Control terminal DZ-MV380A:
provided
DZ-MV550A: Power/Control terminal DZ-MV350A:
not provided
PC connection terminal Type mini-B
[USB standard] [USB 2.0]

2-5
 General Description > Major Differences from Previous Models

Item DZ-MV580A/MV550A DZ-MV380A/MV350A

Dimensions (W × H × D) and DZ-MV580A: DZ-MV380A:
shape Approx. 2-1/2” × 3-1/2” × 5-3/4” Approx. 2-3/8” × 3-11/16” × 5-13/16”
(64 × 89 × 146 mm) (60 × 93 × 148 mm)

DZ-MV550A: DZ-MV350A:
Approx. 2-1/2” × 3-1/2” × 5-3/4” Approx. 2-1/4” × 3-1/2” × 5-1/4”
(64 × 89 × 146 mm) (57 × 89 × 132 mm)

AC adapter/charger DZ-ACS1
Battery pack Provided: DZ-BP14S Provided: DZ-BP14S
(7.2V/1360mA) (7.2V/1360mA)
Optional: DZ-BP14SW Optional: DZ-BP14SW
(7.2V/1360mA) (7.2V/1360mA)
Infrared remote control DZ-RM3W
AV input/output jack Pin 8 type Pin 10 type
Shape of DVD holder

Round DVD holder

PC editing kit Provided

Disc protect Software disc-protect
EIS function DZ-MV580A: Video mode only
DZ-MV550A: Video and photo DZ-MV350A: Video mode only
mode
QUICK MODE switch Provided Not provided
S-Video input function DZ-MV580A: Provided DZ-MV380A: Provided
DZ-MV550A: Not provided DZ-MV350A: Not provided
16:9 function DZ-MV580A: Provided DZ-MV380A: Not provided
(When using DVD-
RAM disc)
DZ-MV550A: Not provided DZ-MV350A: Not provided
Number of pixels for video XTRA/FINE: 704 × 480 pixels
(MPEG2) STD/LPCM: 352 × 480 pixels
Number of pixels for JPEG DZ-MV580A: 1280 × 960 pixels
photo during camera recording DZ-MV550A: 680 × 480 pixels

2-6
 General Description > Major Differences from Previous Models

Item DZ-MV580A/MV550A DZ-MV380A/MV350A

Number of pixels for MPEG 704 × 480 pixels
photo during camera recording
(When using disc)
Number of pixels for photo JPEG: 640 × 480 pixels
during line-input recording MPEG: 704 × 480 pixels
File size of photo DZ-MV580A: DZ-MV380A:
FINE: Approx. 512KB
NORM: Approx. 384KB
ECO: Approx. 256KB
DZ-MV550A: DZ-MV350A:
FINE: Approx. 128KB
NORM: Approx. 64KB
ECO: Approx. 32KB

2-5 Compatibility of Recorded Discs

Discs recorded or edited on DZ-MV580A/MV550A can also be recorded, edited and played back on
other DVD video camera/recorders, except for those for which disc-protect(*1) has been set.
Discs recorded or edited on other DVD video camera/recorders can also be recorded, edited and
played back on DZ-MV580A/MV550A: However, the DZ-MV100A cannot handle DVD-R disc, and a
scene memo recorded on the DZ-MV100A Disc Navigation function cannot be played back or edited
on another DVD video camera/recorder.
*1: The DZ-MV380A/MV350A can release the disc-protect that has been set on DZ-MV580A/MV550A.
Therefore, if the disc-protect set on DZ-MV580A/MV550A is released, the discs can be recorded, edited
and played back on DZ-MV380A/MV350A.

2-7
 General Description > Names of Parts

2-6 Names of Parts

5 6 7 8 1 Infrared receiver
When the remote control is used to operate the
DVD video camera/recorder, this receiver will
receive the infrared signal.
2 Lens cap string attachment hole
3 Recording indicator
The red indicator will light during recording.
4 Stereo microphone
5 Optical 18x zoom lens (DZ-MV550A)
Optical 10x zoom lens (DZ-MV580A)
6 Lens hood
Always remove this lens hood when using
generally available tele-conversion or wide-
conversion lens.
7 Zoom lever
9 10
Push the lever to the T side for telephoto, or
to the W side for wide-angle.
8 Accessory shoe
A/V 13 Only for DZ-MV580A:
BATTERY EJECT
1 2 3 4 MIC
11 12 The optional video flash, etc. can be attached
(Bottom) here. (See the instruction manual of device to be
(Inside the cover) attached for details.)
9 External microphone jack
Although the external appearances of DZ-MV550A 10 AV input/output jack
and DZ-MV580A are different, the
11 2.5" type liquid crystal display (inside)
method of operating both models is identical.
DZ-MV580A illustrations are used in this 12 QUICK MODE switch
manual. To switch the menu display on screen between
Advanced mode and Quick mode.
13 BATTERY EJECT switch
The BATTERY EJECT switch is located on the
bottom of this DVD video camera/recorder:
Slide it when removing the battery.
14 Viewfinder
15 Diopter control
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
To adjust the focus of image appearing in the
viewfinder. (Pull out the viewfinder.)
16 ACCESS/PC indicator
Will blink or light when the disc in DVD video
camera/recorder is accessed (write or read is
executed) or the DVD video camera/recorder
is connected to PC.
17 DISC EJECT button
Press down and release this button to open the
disc guide.
18 Disc insertion block
19 CARD ACCESS indicator
20 Card insertion block
21 Battery attachment platform
22 Record button
23 Power switch
24 LOCK switch
It is recommended that you set the LOCK
switch to (to the left) to prevent the power
switch in the " VIDEO" position from
accidentally moving to " PHOTO".
21 22 23 24 25 26 25 Speaker
26 Hand strap

2-8
 General Description > Names of Parts

27 28 29 30 31 32 33 27 FULL AUTO button

To switch the DVD video camera/recorder to full automatic.
28 FOCUS button
To switch between manual focus and autofocus.
29 EXPOSURE button
Press this button to adjust the exposure.
30 BLC (backlight compensation) button
Press this button when subject is being lighted from rear.
31 DISC NAVIGATION button
32 SELECT button
33 MENU button
Press this button to display the menu for setting camera functions
and Disc Navigation.
34 DISPLAY (Screen display) button
Press this button to display the details of image being played back
or camera setting status, or switch the display off.
34 35 36 37 38 39 35 Volume control buttons (VOL)/ buttons
To adjust the volume of sound from speaker, etc.
36 RESET button
DIGITAL To reset all settings to defaults (status when the DVD video
REC ZOOM ZOOM
camera/recorder was shipped from the factory)
40 46
37 PC connection terminal
41 T
W 38 Joystick
42 47

43 48
49
50 Move the joystick to select a scene or menu item, and then press
DISC the center ( / ) to play back the scene, pause it, or designate
NAVIGATION DISPLAY an option of the menu.
44 51 39 Stop/cancel button
52 To end playback or cancel setting of menu.
MENU SELECT DELETE
45 53 40 REC button
41 DIGITAL ZOOM button
54
42 Reverse skip button
43 Reverse search button
DZ-RM3W
44 DISC NAVIGATION button
45 MENU button
46 ZOOM T button
* The buttons on remote control will function the same as 47 ZOOM W button
those on DVD video camera/recorder. 48 Forward search button
49 Play/pause button
Accessories
50 Forward skip button
Battery AC adapter/ DC power cord AC power cable
(model: DZ-BP14S) chargre 51 DISPLAY button
(model: DZ-ACS1) 52 Stop button
53 DELETE button
54 SELECT button

Infrared remote AV/S input/output Shoulder strap Lens cap and lens
control cable cap string
(Model: DZ-RM3W)

Single-side 8 cm Software CD-ROM PC connection Lithium battery

DVD-RAM disc cable (model CR2025)
(in Round DVD
Holder)

2-9
General Description > List of Abbreviations and Terms for DVD Video Camera/Recorders

2-7 List of Abbreviations and Terms for DVD Video

Camera/Recorders
Index Abbreviation/Term Explanation
A AC3 See Dolby AC3.
C CPRM Content Protection for Recordable Media: Copyright protection function that is
suitable for online distribution of music.
D DCF Design rule for Camera File system standard: This camera file system standard,
established by JEIDA (now merged to JEITA).
Dolby AC3 Audio coding format developed by Dolby Laboratories in U.S, also simply referred
as AC3 format: Supports 5-channel full-range sound and one channel for sub-woofer
sound playback.
DPOF Digital Print Order Format: DPOF allows user to record print information along
with photos on storage media to facilitate printing of photos.
DVD Digital Versatile Disc. A huge amount of digital data for video (movie) and audio
can be recorded on this disc, whose size is the same as CD.
DVD Forum International organization that formulates the technical standards of DVD
DVD-Audio One type of DVD standard disc, on which high-quality audio can be recorded
DVD-R One type of DVD standard disc, to which writing once is possible (recordable type)
DVD-RAM One type of DVD standard disc, to which writing up to 100,000 times is possible
DVD-ROM One type of DVD standard disc, to which data for computer can be recorded
DVD-RW One type of DVD standard disc, to which writing up to 1000 times is possible
DVD-Video One type of DVD standard disc, on which high-quality video and audio can be
recorded
DVD Video Video recording/playback standard that applies to DVD-Video, DVD-R and DVD-
Format RW
DVD Video Video recording/playback standard that applies to DVD-RAM and DVD-RW: This
Recording Format allows versatile editing functions, differing from the DVD Video Format.
E Exif Exchangeable image file format. File format used for recording photos on digital
cameras, established by JEIDA (now merged to JEITA).
F FireWire See IEEE1394.
I IEEE1394 Also referred to as FireWire or i-LINK: Standard for serial interface that connects
PC and peripheral devices
Interlaced CCD This CCD scans one image twice (scans roughly once and interpolates between first
scanning lines the second time) and interlaces the images obtained by scanning
twice to create a one-image signal.
i-LINK See IEEE1394.
J JEIDA JEIDA stands for Japan Electronic Industry Development Association.
JEITA JEITA stands for Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association, which came into existence when JEIDA merged with EIAJ (Electronic
Industries Association of Japan).
JEITA has established Exif and DCF standard.
JPEG Joint Photographic Expert Group: International standard format for compressing
still images
L LCD Liquid Crystal Display. LCD formats include STN and TFT.
LPCM Linear Pulse Code Modulation. Also referred to as linear PCM. LPCM is a format
that digitizes analog audio data during recording and converts it to analog data
during playback.
M MMC See MultiMediaCard.
MMCA See MultiMediaCard Association.

2 - 10
General Description > List of Abbreviations and Terms for DVD Video Camera/Recorders

Index Abbreviation/Term Explanation

M MPEG Motion Picture Experts Group: Standard related to compression of digital video and
audio. MPEG2 is a higher standard of MPEG and is applied to video (movie)
requiring higher quality.
MPEG Audio One of three audio compression standards (layers 1-3) defined by MPEG
Layer 2
MultiMediaCard Also referred to as MMC. Compact memory card, 32 mm long × 24 mm wide × 1.4
mm thick
MultiMediaCard Also referred to as MMCA. This association promotes the widespread use of
Association multimedia cards.
O OSTA Optical Storage Technology Association, which is an international industry
organization that promotes recordable optical storage used to store computer data
and images.
S SCSI Small Computer System Interface: A standard for connecting computer and
peripheral devices. Frequently notated by prefixing or suffixing the number that
indicates the data transfer rate, and First, Ultra, Wide, etc., to SCSI.
SDA See SD Card Association.
SD Card Also referred to as SDA. This organization promotes the popularization of SD
Association memory card.
SDMI Secure Digital Music Initiative: This conference was established by hardware
makers, the Recording Industry Association of America (RIAA) and music industry
companies, to protect copyrights of musical compositions.
SD Memory Card Formally named Secure Digital Memory Card. This compact memory card, 32 mm
long × 24 mm wide × 2.1 mm thick, is equipped with an advanced copyright
protection function.
SecureMMC See Secure MultiMediaCard.
Secure Also referred to as SecureMMC. This compact memory card has multimedia card
MultiMediaCard specifications, to which an advanced copyright protection function is added.
Unusable on the DVD video camera/recorder.
Software disc- This function writes the protect information to DVD-RAM disc to prevent accidental
Protect erasure. Software Disc-Protect is included in DVD-RAM disc specifications defined
by DVD Forum.
STN LCD Super-Twisted Nematic Liquid Crystal Display: This type of color LCD is inferior to
TFT LCD in coloring, view angle, etc.
T TFT LCD Thin Film Transistor Liquid Crystal Display: This type of color LCD features clear
display, high contrast, wide view angle, etc.
U UDF Universal Disc Format, which is a file format of recordable disc defined by OSTA.
The version 2.01 UDF is used on DVD video camera/recorder.
USB Universal Serial Bus: Standard of serial interface that connects PC and peripheral
devices. Two versions - USB1.1 and USB2.0, with different data transfer rates -
exist at present.
V VBR Stands for Variable Bit Rate: This format of coding audio and video varies the
amount of data depending on the subject image.

2 - 11
 3 Description of Operation
3-1 Description of Structure
(1) Configuration and locations of circuit boards
The configuration of circuit boards in DZ-MV580A/MV550A and their locations are very similar to
those in the base models DZ-MV380A/MV350A, except for whether the FAF circuit board is
provided or not.
The DZ-MV380A/MV350A had the FAF circuit board between the FRT and AEL circuit boards:
The DZ-MV580A/MV550A does not have this, since the FRT-H/FRT circuit board is directly
connected to AEL-H/AEL circuit board.

DZ-MV580A DZ-MV380A
DISC DRIVE DISC
UNIT DRIVE FAF
MR CIRCUIT UNIT CIRCUIT
BOARD BOARD
(In the LCD unit)

MR CIRCUIT
BOARD
(In the LCD unit)

FRT-H/FRT FRT
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
BOARD BOARD
GYR-H/GYR
CIRCUIT
SHE-H/SHE
LENS SEN-H BOARD CIRCUIT SEN GYR
UNIT CIRCUIT LENS CIRCUIT CIRCUIT SHE
BOARD BOARD SWL3-H/SWL3 UNIT BOARD BOARD CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT BOARD
BOARD
LCD LCD
CIRCUIT DRF-H/DRF
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DRF
BOARD BOARD CIRCUIT
BOARD
BOARD
MAN-H/MAN
CIRCUIT
BOARD
MAN
SAF-H/SAF CIRCUIT
AEL-H/AEL CIRCUIT AEL BOARD
CIRCUIT USB-H/USB BOARD CIRCUIT USB SAF
BOARD CIRCUIT BOARD CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
BOARD BOARD BOARD
SWL2 Circuit board
CIRCUIT equivalent to
BOARD SWL2
Fig. 3-1-1

3-1
 Description of Operation > Description of Structure / Description of Newly Adapted Technology

(2) Differences in structure between DZ-MV580A and DZ-MV550A

There are two major differences in structure between DZ-MV580A and DZ-MV550A:
1) Accessory shoe
The accessory shoe on DZ-MV580A has a power/control terminal, but the accessory shoe on DZ-
MV550A doesn’t.
2) Lens unit
The lens unit in DZ-MV550A includes the cushion, crystal filter, CCD image sensor and SEN-H
circuit board, which are discrete from the lens unit in DZ-MV580A.

CCD
IMAGE
SENSOR SEN-H
CIRCUIT
BOARD
LENS LENS Circuit board equivalent
to SEN-H
UNIT UNIT

CUSHION
CRYSTAL
FILTER

DZ-MV580A LENS UNIT DZ-MV550A LENS UNIT

Fig. 3-1-2

3-2 Description of Newly Adapted Technology

(1) QUICK MODE switch
The QUICK MODE switch changes over the screen for various settings and for Disc Navigation
between Quick mode and Normal mode.
The Quick mode displays only the fundamental menu items and the brief explanation on the
selected item/function is displayed across the bottom of screen.
Fig. 3-2-1 shows the position of QUICK MODE switch and an example of display screens.

Date/time setting screen in Normal mode:

2-step operation until setting screen appears

Date Setup Date Setup

QUICK MODE switch

Date Mode : M/D/Y Date Mode
Date Set Date Set 1 / 1 / 2004
12:00AM

ENTER RETURN RAM ENTER RETURN RAM

Date/time setting screen in Quick mode:

1-step operation until setting screen appears

Date Setup
Display mode
Camera function Date Set setting is omitted.
1 / 1 / 2004
setup and LCD 12:00AM
monitor setup
are omitted. Set the current date and Item/function
time.
explanatory
ENTER RETURN RAM
display

Fig. 3-2-1
3-2
 4 Troubleshooting
4-1 Procedure for Troubleshooting
Perform troubleshooting in the order shown in Fig. 4-1-1.

No improvement Updating
unneeded No improvement

No message or Check firmware Trouble Check

Check System reset error code Problem guide version
phenomenon (section 4-3) Diagnosis troubleshooting
(section 4-2) appears*1 (section 4-6-1) (section 4-7) with the factory

Updating
needed

: Phenomenon Message Messages and

Troubleshooting Update firmware
appears*1 (section 4-6-2)
(section 4-4) No improvement
: Troubleshooting after updating

: Check Major Error

Error code Codes and
appears*1 Troubleshooting
(section 4-5-3)

Error codes not included in

service manual appear
Check
troubleshooting
with the factory

*1: Messages and error codes will appear on LCD monitor or in viewfinder.

Fig. 4-1-1

Note:
1) Before troubleshooting or servicing, be sure to obtain customer approval for the following:
4.2.1 List of items to be reset
a) The image data stored on disc may be lost depending on the details and situation of fault
(defect).
b) The date/time and various settings, including video recording mode, designated by customer
after purchase may in some cases be reset to the defaults before purchase (factory settings).
2) Take note of settings on received product, referring to “4-2 System Resetting/Resetting Camera
Functions”: The notes will be necessary not only for resetting, but for checking defects that occur
under the particular setting conditions.

4-1
 Troubleshooting > System Resetting/Resetting Camera Functions

4-2 System Resetting/Resetting Camera Functions

The DZ-MV580A/MV550A has two types of reset function: “System reset” and “Resetting camera
functions”.
The reset operation will return the various settings to the defaults when the DZ-MV580A/MV550A
was shipped form factory.

Information:
If a defect occurs in product, take note of settings, and then execute system reset first: The defect
may disappear.

4-2-1 List of items to be reset

Table 4-2-1 shows the items that will be reset to defaults at the factory by the two types of reset
operation: “system reset” and “resetting camera functions”.
Use the memo column provided in the table to enter the settings of any received device.

(1) Procedure for checking settings

1) Use a battery or the AC adapter/charger to power the DZ-MV580A/MV550A.
2) Set the QUICK MODE switch to “OFF”.
3) Insert a DVD-RAM disc, and then set the power switch to “VIDEO”. For subsequent steps,
operate the DZ-MV580A/MV550A while viewing the LCD monitor or viewfinder.
4) Press the MENU button to display the camera function setup menu screen: Make sure of the
settings.
5) Operate the joystick to display the menu screens for record function setup, date function setup,
LCD monitor setup and initial setup in sequence, making sure of the settings.
At this time, the items on photo quality, external photo input and self-timer will not appear, since
they are related to photo recording: Check them in steps 6) and 7).
6) Set the power switch to “[CARD]PHOTO”. It is not necessary to insert a card at this time.
7) Press the MENU button to display the camera function setup menu screen, and then operate the
joystick to display the record function setup menu screen in order to check the settings on photo
quality, external photo input and self-timer.
8) After checking is complete, press the MENU button to restore the ordinary screen.

4-2
 Troubleshooting > System Resetting/Resetting Camera Functions

Yes: Will be reset

Table 4-2-1 List of items to be reset No: Will not be reset
Camera
System Default at
Item function Setting range Remarks Memo
reset factory
reset
Camera Functions Setup
Program AE Yes Yes Auto Auto, Sports, Portrait, Low Light will not
Spotlight, Sand & Snow, appear when “VIDEO
Low Light mode: STD” is
specified.
White Bal. Yes Yes Auto Auto, Set, Outdoor,
Indoor1, Indoor2
EIS Yes Yes On On, Off Displayed on DZ-
MV580A only in the
Video mode
Dig. Zoom Yes Yes 40× 240×, 40×, Off
MIC Filter Yes Yes Off On, Off
16:9 Yes Yes Off On, Off (The DZ-MV550A Displayed only in the
does not have the 16:9 Video mode
setting)
Record Functions Setup
VIDEO Mode Yes Yes FINE With DVD-RAM disc: Displayed only in the
XTRA, FINE, STD Video mode
With DVD-R disc:
FINE, STD
Quality Yes Yes FINE FINE, NORM, ECO Displayed only in the
card photo mode
Input Source Yes Yes CAMERA CAMERA, LINE, S LINE S LINE is displayed
only on DZ-MV580A
PHOTO Input Yes Yes Field Frame, Field
Self Timer Yes Yes Off On, Off
OSD Output Yes Yes On On, Off Displayed only when
“Input Source:
CAMERA” is specified
Date Setup
Date Mode Yes Yes M/D/Y PM5:00 Y/M/D,
5:00PM M/D/Y,
17:00 D/M/Y
Date Set Yes No 1/1/2004
-----------------
12:00AM
LCD Setup
Brightness Yes Yes Center +
Color Level Yes Yes Center +
Initial Setup
Beep Yes Yes On On, Off
Power Save Yes Yes Off On, Off
Record LED Yes Yes On On, Off
Language Yes Yes English English, French,
Spanish, German, Italian
Demo Mode Yes Yes Auto Auto, Off, Start

4-3
 Troubleshooting > System Resetting/Resetting Camera Functions

4-2-2 System reset procedure

1) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, and
then disconnect the battery or AC adapter/
charger. RESET
2) Use a fine tipped pen, etc. to hold down the
RESET button for approx. 2 seconds.

Fig. 4-2-1

4-2-3 Procedure for resetting camera functions

1) Connect the battery or AC adapter/charger to power the DZ-MV580A/MV550A.
2) Set the power switch to “VIDEO” and place the DZ-MV580A/MV550A in the recording pause
status; loading disc is not necessary at this time. For the following steps, operate DZ-MV580A/
MV550A while viewing the LCD monitor or viewfinder.
3) Set the quick mode switch to “OFF”.
4) Press the MENU button to display the camera setting menu screen.
5) Use the joystick to choose “Initial Setup”, and then press the center of joystick.
6) Use the joystick to choose “Reset”, and then press the center of joystick: The screen for verifying
reset will appear.
7) Use the joystick to choose “YES”, and then press the center of joystick: Reset will be executed.
8) After reset, press the MENU button to close the camera setting menu.

4-4
 Troubleshooting > Problem Guide

4-3 Problem Guide

Check the following before judging that DZ-MV580A/MV550A is faulty.

Symptom Cause and Correction

Power supplies
Battery cannot be charged. Is the DC power cord connected to AC adapter/charger?
Unplug it. If the DC power cord is connected, the AC adapter/charger will not
enter the charge status.
Is the battery abnormally hot?
Remove the battery from AC adapter/charger, leave it as is until it cools down,
and then charge it again.
Has the battery been unused for a long time?
Remove the battery from AC adapter/charger, and then reattach it. If the
battery is still not charged, it may be dead: Purchase a new one.
* If the battery does not charge after you try the above four procedures, it may
be dead: Purchase a new battery.
Battery weakens fast. Is the ambient temperature is too low or high?
Always charge the battery at 50 - 86°F (10 - 30°C.)
Are you using the DZ-MV580A/MV550A where the temperature is low?
A fully charged battery may be discharged sooner than usual at low
temperatures. Keep extra batteries on hand.
Battery may be dead: Replace with a new one.
The performance of battery will deteriorate if it is used for an extended period of
time or frequently.
The CHARGE indicator on Is the ambient temperature is too low or high?
AC adapter/charger is Always charge the battery at 50 - 86°F (10 - 30°C.)
blinking. The battery may be over-discharged.
Continue charging: The CHARGE indicator will change to a steady light, and
the battery will be charged normally.
Power turns off immediately Is battery charged?
after being turned on. Charge it.
Power goes off unexpectedly. Is Power Save specified "On"?
The specifications state that the powered DZ-MV580A/MV550A automatically
turns off if it is left for as long as 5 minutes without performing recording or
playback, with "Power Save: On" specified. Set the power switch to "POWER
OFF", and then turn DZ-MV580A/MV550A on again. To stop automatic power
off, specify "Power Save: Off".
Power cannot be turned off. Execute system reset (disconnect the battery or AC adapter/charger, and then
use a fine tipped pen, etc. to hold down the RESET button for several seconds).
Then connect a battery or AC adapter/charger and make sure the DZ-MV580A/
MV550A accepts operation.
System reset will return the date/time and all items set using menu (except for
LCD settings) to the defaults at the factory. After recovery, reset the date/time
and each setting item as required.

4-5
 Troubleshooting > Problem Guide
Symptom
Pressing the REC button
will not start recording.
Recording starts but stops
immediately.
Power switch does not
change to PHOTO (disc).
LCD screen is hard to see.
Black dots or red, blue or
green dots always lit appear
on LCD screen or in
Viewfinder.
Focus is not correct.
Cause and Correction
During recording
Is input image copy-guarded?
The specifications state that DZ-MV580A/MV550A cannot record a copy-guarded
image.
Does dirt or fingerprint adhere to
Disc cleaning method:
disc, or is disc scratched?
Use soft cloth to clean
Clean the disc. If there is still no from inner to outer
circumference in
improvement, replace the disc. axial direction.
[Never use solvent.]
Is some other AV device directly connected to the AV input/output jack of DZ-
MV580A/MV550A?
If the AV device is connected via several other devices, such as AV selector, the
video signal may not be transmitted correctly. In such a case, reduce the number
of devices through which the video signal is transmitted, or connect AV device
directly.
Are you attempting to record image from video game or PC?
Depending on video game or PC, image cannot be recorded on DZ-MV580A/
MV550A.
Is the LOCK switch beside the power switch set to the left? Switch it to the right
to release the lock.
Has brightness of LCD screen been adjusted?
Stop recording and adjust the brightness.
Is DZ-MV580A/MV550A being used outdoors?
Use the viewfinder. When using LCD monitor, adjust angle so that LCD screen
is not exposed to direct sunlight.
The panels used for LCD monitor and viewfinder of DZ-MV580A/MV550A are
produced using highly precise technology. However, 0.01% or less of total pixels
may not light (black dots) or may remain lit (red, blue, green dots). (The effective
amount of pixels on LCD panel is 99.99% or more.) This shows the limitations of
the current technology, and does not indicate a fault that will interfere with the
operation of LCD panel or operation of DZ-MV580A/MV550A.
Is it difficult to use auto-focus with the subject?
Focus manually.
Does "MF" appear?
The DZ-MV580A/MV550A is set to manual focus. Focus the subject manually, or
release manual focus.
Is the diopter control of viewfinder correctly adjusted?
Adjust the diopter control.
In cases other than the above, set the power switch to "POWER OFF", and then
reset it to a position other then “POWER OFF”.
4-6
 Troubleshooting > Problem Guide
Symptom
Recognition of disc is not
complete.
Pressing the playback
button will not start
playback.
No playback image appears
on TV screen.
Playback picture is
momentarily interrupted.
Poor playback picture.
Playback picture is greatly
distorted.
No sound.
Disc Navigation thumbnails
do not appear.
Photos on card cannot be
played back.
It will take some time to
play back photos on card.
Cause and Correction
During playback
Does dirt or fingerprint adhere to disc, or is disc scratched?
Clean the disc.
Was the image recorded on a device other than DZ-MV580A/MV550A?
Playback of image recorded on devices other than DZ-MV580A/MV550A may be
impossible.
Has scene been edited on a device other than DZ-MV580A/MV550A?
If a scene that was recorded on DZ-MV580A/MV550A is edited on a device other
than DZ-MV580A/MV550A, playback may not be possible on DZ-MV580A/
MV550A.
Is TV input selector set correctly?
If the TV has multiple video input jacks, check to see whether the correct input
jack was selected.
If DZ-MV580A/MV550A is connected to VCR, set the input selector of VCR to
"external input (LINE)".
Is DZ-MV580A/MV550A connected to TV correctly?
Check the connections.
Does dirt or fingerprint adhere to disc, or is disc scratched?
Clean the disc.
Was the image input from analog VCR (VHS, 8 mm) and recorded?
The problem may be improved if a VCR equipped with TBC (time base corrector)
circuit is used for playback.
Was recording of external input made with "Frame" specified?
Specify "Field" for "PHOTO Input" in record mode settings.
Is the TV volume control set correctly?
Adjust volume control on TV.
Did the image recorded from AV input/output jack have noise or disturbance?
Re-record image with no noise or disturbance.
Is a photo recorded on devices other than DZ-MV580A/MV550A being played
back?
The DZ-MV580A/MV550A specifications allow it to play back photos that are
recorded conforming to DCF standard and have 80-4000 horizontal pixels x 60-
3000 vertical pixels.
Make sure that the photo to be played back satisfies these specifications. Note
that even photos that satisfy the specifications may not be playable, depending
on the recording status.
The thumbnail of any photo that cannot be played back will appear in single
blue.
Is a photo with a large number of pixels being played back?
It will take some time to play back a photo with a large number of pixels.
4-7
 Troubleshooting > Problem Guide

Symptom Cause and Correction

When connected to PC (when using provided software)
No drive icon appears on PC. Is DZ-MV580A/MV550A turned on?
Connect the AC adapter/charger and set the power switch to a position other
than "POWER OFF".
Is PC connection cable properly plugged in?
Plug the PC connection cable connector completely into DZ-MV580A/MV550A.
Turn PC off and unplug the PC connection cable: Then restart PC and use the
PC connection cable to connect the DZ-MV580A/MV550A and PC.
The USB device driver installed in PC is not properly recognized.
Restart PC. If the drive icon still does not appear, use "Refresh driver" in Device
Manager to reinstall the USB device driver.
If a yellow "!" mark is attached to some device in Windows Device Manager,
uninstall the USB device driver, and then reinstall it.
A fatal exception 0A error It is recommended that you install Windows 2000 Service Pack 3 or later.
occurs while installing USB
driver in Windows 2000
Professional
Application is not normally Turn the PC and DZ-MV580A/MV550A off, and try again.
run on PC.
DISC EJECT button does The DISC EJECT button is invalid while DZ-MV580A/MV550A is connected to
not work when DZ-MV580A/ PC.
MV550A is connected to PC. Start Windows Explorer, right-click the drive icon corresponding to DZ-MV580A/
MV550A, and then click "Eject".
Disc cannot be ejected even Was DVD-MovieAlbbumSE (software provided with DZ-MV580A/MV550A)
by operating Windows started?
Explorer or applications. Terminate DVD-MovieAlbbumSE.
When the time stamp of file Since the file system of DZ-MV580A/MV550A is operated on Greenwich Mean
on DVD-RAM disc is viewed Time (GMT), the time stamp will be GMT.
on PC, it is different from However, since the time lag information is recorded on disc, date/time display on
the actual recording date/ DZ-MV580A/MV550A playback screen will be the actual recording date/time.
time.
Error occurs in playback of If error occurs with USB connection, the transfer rate is not sufficient.
DZ-MV580A/MV550A on PC It is recommended that you use a USB terminal conforming to USB2.0 when
connecting the DVD video camera/recorder.
Error occurs during writing The temperature of DZ-MV580A/MV550A is too high due to continuous
to DVD-R disc. operation.
Disconnect the DZ-MV580A/MV550A from PC, remove the disc from DZ-
MV580A/MV550A, set the power switch to "POWER OFF", and then leave it as
is until the temperature decreases. After checking that the temperature has
gone down, use a brand-new disc and restart operation.
Transfer of images stops. The USB terminal of PC may be faulty.
Connect the DZ-MV580A/MV550A to another USB terminal of PC.
If your PC is desktop type, it is recommended that you use USB terminal on the
back of PC. If you are using USB2.0 extended card, it is also recommended that
you install the newest version driver provided each USB2.0 card maker.

4-8
 Troubleshooting > Problem Guide

Symptom Cause and Correction

DVD-RAM/R/RW drive built This problem may be solved if the software related to DVD-RAM/R/RW built
into PC cannot be used after into PC is upgraded, or if the UDF driver is uninstalled. However, if the OS of
the provided software has PC is Windows 98 Second Edition/Me/2000 Professional, uninstalling the UDF
been installed. driver will make it impossible for the photos recorded on DVD-RAM disc in DZ-
MV580A/MV550A to be read by the PC.
Video is not recognized by Is the power switch of DZ-MV580A/MV550A set to "VIDEO" or “PHOTO (disc)”?
software in PC. Set it to "VIDEO" or “PHOTO (disc).
DVD-R disc cannot be played DVD-MovieAlbumSE is exclusively for DVD-RAM disc. When playing back
back on DVD- DVD-R disc on PC, use generally available DVD-R disc playback software.
MovieAlbumSE
Error appears when starting Make sure that your PC display adapter (video card) conforms to DirectX8.1
DVD-MovieAlbumSE
Video written to hard disk of The specifications state that DVD-MovieAlbumSE complies only with images
PC using DVD- recorded on DVD-RAM disc: It cannot edit video (DVD-VR) data stored on hard
MovieAlbumSE copy tool disk of PC. To edit image data stored on hard disk, copy the data to DVD-RAM
cannot be edited. disc and then edit it.
When DVD -MovieAlbumSE Is a disc other than DVD-RAM loaded?
software provided with DZ- Load a DVD-RAM disc. DVD-MovieAlbumSE is exclusively for DVD-RAM disc.
MV580A/MV550A is started, Use the following procedure to select the drive where DVD-RAM disc is loaded.
"Disc in Drive X: cannot be 1) Click the "Preference" button in the dialog box.
used on MovieAlbum" 2) Click "Preference".
appears (a letter showing 3) Click "Device Setting".
the drive where disc is 4) Choose the drive where DVD-RAM disc is loaded in the "Drive Select" column,
loaded appears in X). and then click "OK".
An image that should have Use the following procedure to select the drive where DVD-RAM disc is loaded.
been recorded does not 1) Click the "Preference" button at the top right of DVD-MovieAlbumSE screen.
appear when DVD- 2) Click "Preference".
MovieAlbumSE is started. 3) Click "Device Setting".
4) Choose the drive where DVD-RAM disc is loaded in the "Drive Select" column,
and then click "OK".
Executing “Export” on DVD- Do not choose “Simple Export”: If you do, reading will stop midway.
MovieAlbumSE will
interrupt reading midway
When executing “Export” on a) If photo is included in the range of “export”, it may take more time because
DVD-MovieAlbumSE, it will data must be re-encoded and read.
take time to read b) If “Divide by Maker” is not chosen, it may take some time because data will
be read while being re-encoded.
"Hardware Removal" results Making sure the ACCESS/PC indicator on DZ-MV580A/MV550A goes out, turn
in error the PC off, and then unplug the PC connection cable from DZ-MV580A/MV550A.
If your PC uses Windows 2000 Professional, the problem may be solved it you
install Windows 2000 Service Pack 3 or later.
“USBNTMAP.SYS not You have designated a folder which is different from that for Windows when
found” appears while installing USB driver: Designate the correct folder.
installing USB driver
No USB HS (high speed) Make sure that you have already installed the driver provided with the USB2.0
connection even when card. You will need to install the driver provided by USB2.0 card maker in
USB2.0 card is used order to operate the USB2.0 card at HS (high speed).

4-9
 Troubleshooting > Problem Guide

Symptom Cause and Correction

“DISC ERROR” appears A disc that was write-protected using the write-protect setting tool (WPTOOL)
when releasing write-protect equipped with the UDF driver on the CD-ROM provided with this DVD video
camera/recorder cannot be released on this DVD video camera/recorder as is.
Use the write-protect setting tool on PC to release the write-protect.
The “capture” function of The “capture” function of MyDVD is only for DVD camera with i.Link
MyDVD is unavailable. connection: It is not available on this DZ-MV580A/MV550A.
Use DVD-MovieAlbumSE to import the images recorded on DVD-RAM disc into
the PC.
Miscellaneous
Power does not come on, or
Execute system reset (disconnect the battery or AC adapter/charger, and then
no operation occurs by use a fine tipped pen, etc. to hold down the RESET button for several seconds).
pressing button. Then connect a battery or AC adapter/charger and make sure the DZ-MV580A/
MV550A accepts operation.
System reset will return the date/time and all items set using menu (except for
LCD settings) to the defaults at the factory. After recovery, reset the date/time
and each setting item as required.
Has DZ-MV580A/MV550A been subjected to impact?
The DZ-MV580A/MV550A could be damaged.
The date and time are Has the DZ-MV580A/MV550A been left unused for a long period of time?
incorrect. The internal backup battery may be discharged: Charge it. (Charge procedure:
Connect the AC adapter/charger to the DZ-MV580A/MV550A and AC outlet, set
the power switch on DZ-MV580A/MV550A to "POWER OFF", and then leave
them for at least 24 hours.)
No scene can be deleted. Is the cursor placed on scene to be deleted?
Even if desired scenes are selected using yellow cursor, if there are the selected
scenes (in red frame), those scenes in red frame will be deleted. Check the color
of cursor and bar graph on the thumbnail display screen.
Disc cannot be removed. Is battery or AC adapter/charger (power supply) connected?
With the DZ-MV580A/MV550A, a disc cannot be removed unless a power supply
is connected.
Has disc rotation stopped?
Making sure the disc stops, and then restart operation. Disc cannot be removed
until rotation has stopped.
Did you disconnect the battery or AC adapter/charger (power supply) while the
disc was being accessed?
Reconnect power supply, set the power switch to "VIDEO", and then remove the
disc after the sound showing the disc lock has been released is heard.
If the disc still cannot be removed, the DZ-MV580A/MV550A is faulty: Refer to
"4-8 Procedure for Removing Disc from Faulty DZ-MV580A/MV550A".
DZ-MV580A/MV550A cannot Is the remote control pointed at the infrared receiver on DZ-MV580A/MV550A?
be operated from remote Point it at the infrared receiver on DZ-MV580A/MV550A.
control. Is the infrared receiver on DZ-MV580A/MV550A exposed to direct sunlight or
strong fluorescent light?
The remote control cannot operate DZ-MV580A/MV550A when strong light
strikes the infrared receiver. Adjust the position or angle of DZ-MV580A/
MV550A.
Is there a battery in the remote control?
Also check the polarities of battery. Replace the battery if necessary.
Is DZ-MV580A/MV550A powered?
Turn it on.
4 - 10
 Troubleshooting > Problem Guide
Symptom
Disc cover cannot be closed.
Operating sound is heard
cyclically.
DZ-MV580A/MV550A
vibrates.
Slight sound is heard from
DZ-MV580A/MV550A.
Cause and Correction
Is disc correctly loaded?
Remove the disc and then reload it.
Is round DVD holder being used?
A bare disc that is not in round DVD holder, or is in a square cartridge or caddy,
cannot be used. Put disc in the round DVD holder.
Is round DVD holder inserted in the proper orientation?
Remove the round DVD holder, make sure of the orientation, and then reinsert
it.
Is DZ-MV580A/MV550A turned on?
Connect the AC adapter/charger or full charged battery and set the power switch
to a position other than “POWER OFF”.
This sound is heard because the disc is cyclically operated; it does not indicate a
fault.
This does not indicate a fault.
These vibrations or sound are generated when the disc drive unit is operating.
4 - 11
Troubleshooting > Messages and Troubleshooting

4-4 Messages and Troubleshooting

Some messages may appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder during operation.
If a message appears, refer to the following table and perform troubleshooting according to the
message.
Messages divided by broken lines will automatically appear in sequence from the upper row each
time the center of joystick is pressed.

Message
Battery is almost empty.
Replace it.
Cannot combine scene.
Cannot combine.
Deselect PHOTO scenes.
Cannot combine.
Select multiple scenes.
Cannot delete scenes.
Cause/condition for
message to appear
Appears if the battery is discharged.
Appears if an attempt is made to
combine unconnected scenes: The
specifications state that combining of
only multiple scenes is possible.
Appears if an attempt is made to
combine scenes when a photo was
selected: The specification state that
combining of only video scenes is
possible.
Appears when combining one scene was
attempted.
Appears when user performed deletion at
the upper limit of 999 scenes registered.
*1
Troubleshooting
Replace with a charged battery, or
use the AC adapter/charger to power
DZ-MV580A/MV550A.
Stop trying to combine scenes, or
create a play list containing the
scenes to be combined, and combine
them on the play list.
Select only video scenes, or stop
trying to combine scenes.
Select multiple scenes and then
combine them.
Combine divided scenes, and then
delete if necessary.*2

Cannot execute. Appears if an attempt is made to select Divide scenes one by one.
Unselect multiple scenes. multiple scenes for division: The
specifications state that dividing
multiple scenes is impossible.
Cannot execute. Appears when combining or moving Specify “Category: All”, and then
Change display scenes was instructed with “Category: operate DZ-MV580A/MV550A again.
category to All. VIDEO or PHOTO” specified.
CANNOT RECORD Appears if an attempt is made to record Use a DVD-RAM disc or card when
PHOTOS. photos on DVD-R disc: The specifications recording photos.
state that no photo is recordable on
DVD-R disc.
*1: the DVD video recording format defines the maximum number of entry points as 999: Since one entry
point is allocated to one scene, the maximum number of scenes recordable on disc with DZ-MV580A/
MV550A is 999.
*2: If recording is continued without editing, one scene will comprise one cell for each entry point.
When scenes are combined, only the number of entry points will decrease (only the entry point is deleted);
the number of cells will not decrease. Assume, for example, that the number of cells before scenes are
combined is 999, which is the upper limit defined by the DVD video recording format. If a scene
comprising one cell is divided at two points and the scene between the divided scenes needs to be deleted,
the cell must be further divided in order to delete. However, since the number of cells has reached the
upper limit in this case, the cell cannot be divided and the scene cannot be deleted.

4 - 12
Troubleshooting > Messages and Troubleshooting
Message
Cannot replace thumbnail
on PHOTO scenes.
Cannot select any more
scenes
CARD ALMOST FULL
Card error has occurred.
Format the card now?
Card error has occurred.
Formatting is not complete.
Card error has occurred.
Keep card inside & restart.
Card error.
Card full.
Card full.
Cannot execute.
Card is not formatted.
Format the card now.
YES NO
Cause/condition for
Troubleshooting
message to appear
Appears when a photo thumbnail was Select a video to change the
selected for change in scene editing thumbnail.
menu: The specifications stipulate that
the thumbnail of photo cannot be
changed.
Appears when the number of scenes Release the selection of unnecessary
selected on card has exceeded the upper scenes.
limit of 999 scenes.
Appears when the remaining recordable Prepare another card, or delete
number of photos is less than 10 during unnecessary photos.
recording.
Appears when a card initialized on PC, Choose “YES” and designate it to
etc., or a card whose initialization was initialize the card (deleting all
interrupted before, is loaded. recorded data).
Appears when a damaged card is Replace the card.
initialized.
Appears when no photo could be recorded Set the power switch to “POWER
on card normally. OFF”, and after several seconds, set
it to “[CARD]PHOTO”.
Initialize the card (deleting all
recorded data).
Appears when the card cannot be Use a dry cloth to clean the card
recognized because its terminals are terminals.
dirty.
Also appears when data other than Replace the card.
photos is recorded on card.
Appears when the recording capacity of Replace the card, or delete
card has reached the limit during unnecessary photos
recording. .
Appears when a card whose remaining Replace the card, or delete
recording capacity is small, and on which unnecessary photos.
no photo can be recorded, is loaded.
Appears when the remaining capacity of Replace the card, or delete
card has reached the recordable limit. unnecessary photos.
Appears when an unformatted card or a Choose “YES” and designate it when
card formatted on PC was loaded. formatting card (deleting all recorded
data).
4 - 13
Troubleshooting > Messages and Troubleshooting

Message
Control Information Error.
Cause/condition for
message to appear
Appears if mismatch has occurred
between the recorded video and the
scene information because editing was
performed near the limit of disc storage
capacity on a device other than DZ-
MV580A/MV550A; it also appears if the
control information file was operated.
Also appears when reading or writing
from/to recorded file cannot be performed
because the disc is dirty.
Troubleshooting
Update the control information.
(Start Disc Navigation, press the
MENU button, and then execute
“Update Control Info.” in the “Disc”
menu.
Clean the disc, or replace it.
Disc cleaning method:
Use soft cloth to clean
from inner to outer
circumference in
axial direction.

[Never use solvent.]

COPY PROTECT Appears if an attempt is made to record Stop trying to record.

copy-guarded image. The specifications
state that copy-guarded image cannot be
recorded on DZ-MV580A/MV550A.
Data error in a part of image Appears if writing to file cannot be Choose “YES” and designate partial
file. completed normally because power was repair (automatic repair) of video file.
Repair disc now? turned off by mistake during video Choosing “NO” will display a
YES NO recording or editing, and an abnormality message for verifying initialization.*3
in part of the file is recognized.
Also appears when condensation occurs Do not execute repair, but set the
on lens or drive of DZ-MV580A/MV550A. power switch to “POWER OFF” with
Condensation will occur when the DZ- the disc loaded, and then leave the
MV580A/MV550A is moved from a cold DZ-MV580A/MV550A in a dry place
place to a warm place. until condensation disappears
(usually 1-2 hours).
*3: Take care with the following when repairing video file:
a) If the disc is removed while it is being recognized, the repair function of video file will be invalid.
b) If the timing when power is turned off is inappropriate, normal repair may be impossible.
c) If the disc has data that was recorded on a device other than DZ-MV580A/MV550A, normal repair may be
impossible.
d) The repaired data may be different from the original recorded content because of partial deletion of a
defective portion.
e) The repaired data (only corrected portion in case of partial repair) will lose the original date/time
information because the information for date/time when repair was executed will be added.
f) If “all repair” is executed, repair will be made in the order of all videos and all photos, and the time-
sequential relationship of recorded contents may be lost.

4 - 14
Troubleshooting > Messages and Troubleshooting
Message
Data error in all image file.
Repair all data now?
YES NO
DISC ××××
(4-digit alpha-numerals
showing the code of trouble
will appear in ××××.)
DISC ACCESS
DISC ALMOST FULL
Disc error
Disc error has occurred.
Finalizing is not complete.
Cause/condition for
message to appear
Appears if writing to file cannot be
completed normally because power was
turned off by mistake during video
recording or editing, and it is recognized
that the video file must be totally
repaired.
Also appears when condensation occurs
on lens or drive of DZ-MV580A/MV550A.
Condensation will occur when the DZ-
MV580A/MV550A is moved form a cold
place to a warm place.
Appears if the self-diagnosis function in
DZ-MV580A/MV550A detects a serious
problem.
This message appears during normal
operation process, when DZ-MV580A/
MV550A checks whether a proper disc
has been loaded or not. It is displayed for
a longer time period when the date has
changed.
This message appears during normal
operation process, when the recorded
images are being stored on disc.
Appears if the remaining video
recordable time on disc is less than 10
minutes, or the remaining number of
recordable photos is less than 10.
Appears when the disc has been edited
on a device other than DZ-MV580A/
MV550A, and mismatch has occurred in
recorded data.
Also appears when reading or writing
from/to recorded file cannot be performed
because the disc is dirty.
Appears when the disc could not be
finalized because it was dirty.
Appears if accident, such as power off,
has occurred during finalizing.
If the message still appears even when
the disc has been cleaned and finalized
again and again, the disc may be
defective.
4 - 15
Troubleshooting
Choose “YES” and designate total
repair (automatic repair) of video file.
Choosing “NO” will display a
message for verifying initialization.
[Refer to *3 page 4-14]
Do not execute repair, but set the
power switch to “POWER OFF” with
the disc loaded, and then leave the
DZ-MV580A/MV550A in a dry place
until condensation disappears
(usually 1-2 hours).
Take note of the 4-digit alpha-
numerals in ××××, and refer to “4-5
Self-Diagnosis Function and
Troubelshooting”.
Operate DZ-MV580A/MV550A after
the message disappears.
Operate DZ-MV580A/MV550A after
the message disappears.
Delete unnecessary scenes, or replace
the disc.
Format the disc (deleting all recorded
data), or replace the disc.
Clean the disc, or replace it.
[Refer to page 4-14]
Clean the disc, or replace it.
[Refer to page 4-14]
Set the power switch to “POWER
OFF” and reconnect the AC adapter/
charger; then set the power switch to
“VIDEO” and start finalizing again.
Or press the DISC EJECT button,
reload the disc, and then execute
finalizing.
Replace the disc.
Troubleshooting > Messages and Troubleshooting
Message
Disc error has occurred.
Format the disc now?
YES NO
Disc error has occurred.
Formatting is not complete.
Disc error has occurred.
Keep disc inside & restart.
Disc full.
Cannot execute.
Disc has no data.
Disc has no PlayList.
Disc includes protected
scenes.
Delete scenes?
YES NO
Disc is full.
Cannot add control info.
Disc is not formatted.
Format the disc now?
YES NO
Cause/condition for
message to appear
Appears when a DVD-RAM disc
initialized on PC, etc., or a card whose
initialization was suspended before, is
loaded.
Appears when the disc could not be
normally formatted because it was dirty.
Also appears when a warped or distorted
disc was loaded, or a logically damaged
disc whose formatting was suspended is
loaded.
Appears if a problem has occurred during
editing of video file.
Appears if the recording capacity of disc
has reached the limit during editing of
video file.
Appears when the MANU button or
playback button was pressed with no
scene recorded.
Appears if switching of play list is
selected with no play list registered.
Appears if the loaded disc has a program
(scene) that is write-protected by the
software write-protect function, which is
effective in program units. Although the
DZ-MV580A/MV550A is equipped with a
software disc-protect function that is
effective for disc units, it does not comply
with software write-protect for program
units. (The DVD Forum defines two
types of software protect for DVD-RAM
disc: disc units and program units.)
Appears if the number of scenes on play
list exceeds the upper limit (999) while
control information is being added.
[Refer to *1 page 4-12]
Appears when an unformatted DVD-
RAM disc or one initialized (other
UDF2.0) on PC is loaded.
Also appears if user rejects partial repair
or total repair of video file.
4 - 16
Troubleshooting
Choose “YES” and designate it to
initialize the DVD-RAM disc
(deleting all recorded data).
Clean the disc, or replace it.
[Refer to page 4-14]
Replace the disc.
Exit the Disc Navigation function and
set the power switch to “POWER
OFF” with the disc loaded; then
reconnect the AC adapter/charger
and set the power switch to “VIDEO”
or “PHOTO (disc)”. (The DZ-MV580A/
MV550A will automatically repair
the video file.)
Delete unnecessary scenes, or replace
the disc.
Operate DZ-MV580A/MV550A after
the message disappears.
Operate DZ-MV580A/MV550A after
the message disappears.
Release the write-protect using the
device that has the software write-
protect function for program units, or
choose “YES” and designate it to
delete the scenes.
Delete any unnecessary scenes, or
combine several scenes, and then
operate the DZ-MV580A/MV550A.
When initializing it (deleting all
recorded data), choose “YES” and
designate it.
Choose “NO” and designate partial
repair or total repair. When
initializing it (deleting all recorded
data), choose “YES” and designate it.
Troubleshooting > Messages and Troubleshooting

Cause/condition for
Message Troubleshooting
message to appear
Disc is not formatted. Appears when a brand-new DVD-R disc When recording on DZ-MV580A/
If it formats, it becomes was loaded. MV550A, choose “YES” and designate
possible to use for camera. it. When recording video edited on PC
However, when you record connected via the PC connection
from PC connection terminal, choose “NO” and designate
terminal, please do not it.*4
format.
Format the disc now?
YES NO
Disc overheat. Appears when the temperature inside Set the power switch to “POWER
Please retry later. DZ-MV580A/MV550A, or the OFF” with the disc loaded, and then
temperature of disc, is too high, and leave the DZ-MV580A/MV550A in a
normal operation cannot be executed. well-ventilated place until the inside
temperature decreases.
DPOF is not set to scene Appears if “Slide Show: DPOF” is Specify “Slide Show: All”, or do not
specified when a card for which DPOF try slide show.
has not been set is loaded.
DPOF scenes over limit. Appears when the number of settable Release unnecessary DOPF setting
Cannot set DPOF scenes. scenes for DPOF has exceeded 999. on photos when newly setting DPOF.
DVD-R Disc, Video mode Appears if an attempt is made to change Stop trying to change the Video
cannot be changed. the Video recording mode of a recorded recording mode, or replace the disc.
DVD-R disc. Once even one scene is
recorded on a DVD-R disc which has
been initialized, the originally
designated Video recording mode is
specified to be maintained until the final
recording on the disc.
Also appears after the DVD-R disc has Operate DZ-MV580A/MV550A after
been initialized. the message disappears.
END OF DISC Appears if the disc recordable capacity Replace the disc.
has reached the limit during recording.
End scene cannot be divided. Appears when the last image of scene Stop trying to divide a scene.
was selected to divide the scene: The
specifications state that dividing a scene
at its end is not possible.
Error has occurred. Appears if the self-diagnosis function of Take note of the 4-digit alpha-
Error code No. ×××× DZ-MV580A/MV550A has detected a numerals in ××××, and refer to “4-5
Please read the manual. serious problem when power was turned Self-Diagnosis Function and
(4-digit alpha-numerals on, or the same trouble occurred three Remedy”.
showing the code of trouble consecutive times in modes other than
will appear in ××××.) recording.
*4: The purpose of formatting DVD-R disc on DZ-MV580A/MV550A is to write to disc a program exclusively
for camera recording that is necessary to record images shot by camera in real time (increasing the
response from disc). When recording images that were edited using PC on DVD-R disc via the PC
connection terminal, do not format the disc: The program used exclusively for camera recording will
disable normal recording.

4 - 17
Troubleshooting > Messages and Troubleshooting
Message
Error has occurred.
Please reinsert a disc.
Error has occurred.
Please restart.
Error occurred.
Please replace disc or format RAM disc after message “Data error in
disc
Error occurred.
Please replace disc.
ERROR ××××
(4-digit alpha-numerals
showing the code of trouble
will appear in ××××.)
Finalize may not be
complete.
Finalize again now?
YES NO
Found error in image file.
Repair disc now?
YES NO
It is unrecordable on this
card.
Cause/condition for
message to appear
Appears if, when power was turned on,
the self-diagnosis function of DZ-
MV580A/MV550A detected a slight
trouble that can be fixed: See “4-5 Self-
Diagnosis Function and
Troubleshooting” for details.
Appears if, when power was turned on,
the self-diagnosis function of DZ-
MV580A/MV550A detected a slight
trouble that can be fixed by turning
power on again: See “4-5 Self-Diagnosis
Function and Troubleshooting” for
details.
Appears if repair has failed with DVD-
all image file. Repair all data now?” or
“Found error in image file. Repair data
now?” appeared.
Appears if repair has failed with DVD-R
disc after message “Data error in all
image file. Repair all data now?” or
“Found error in image file. Repair data
now?” appeared.
Appears if the self-diagnosis function in
DZ-MV580A/MV550A detects a serious
problem during recording, or when the
same trouble occurs three times
consecutively during recording.
Appears if accident, such as power off,
occurred during finalizing, and then
power was turned on again or disc was
reloaded.
Appears if repair has failed after
message “Data error in a part of image
file. Repair disc now?” appeared.
Appears when a card other than SD
memory card or MultiMediaCard was
loaded.
4 - 18
Troubleshooting
Set the power switch to “POWER
OFF”, press the DISC EJECT button,
and then reinsert the disc. After that,
set the power switch to “VIDEO” or
“PHOTO (disc)”.
Set the power switch to “POWER
OFF”, reconnect the AC adapter/
charger or battery, and then set the
power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO
(disc)”.
Initialize the disc (deleting all
recorded data), or replace the disc.
Replace the disc.
Take note of the 4-digit alpha-
numerals in ××××, and refer to “4-5
Self-Diagnosis Function and
Troubelshooting”.
Choose “YES” and designate it to
finalize the disc.
Choose “YES” and designate total
repair (automatic repair) of video file.
Choosing “NO” will display a message
for verifying initialization. [Refer to
*3 on page 4-14]
Insert an SD memory card or
MultiMediaCard.
Troubleshooting > Messages and Troubleshooting

Cause/condition for
Message Troubleshooting
message to appear
JPEG file related to scenes Appears when an attempt is made to Copy photos to card via PC. The
are not found. copy photos on disc to card, when photo photo (JPEG) file for storage is stored
(JPEG) file to be copied is not stored on in DCIM\100HPNX1 folder.
disc. When DZ-MV580A/MV550A records
a photo on disc, two photo files will be
stored on disc - a photo (conforming to
DVD video recording format) file to be
displayed on DZ-MV580A/MV550A, and
a photo (JPEG) file for storage that is
linked to the photo for display. This
message will appear when only the photo
file for storage has been deleted on PC,
etc.
No card Appears when no card is loaded. Insert a card.
No card. Please insert card. Appears when recording photos on card Insert a card.
was attempted with no card loaded.
NO DISC Appears if no disc is loaded. Load a disc
If the message appears even when a disc Set the power switch to “POWER
is loaded, condensation might have OFF” with the disc loaded, and then
occurred on lens or drive of DZ-MV580A/ leave the DZ-MV580A/MV550A in a
MV550A. dry place until condensation
disappears (usually 1-2 hours).
No more scenes. Appears during user operation; all Operate DZ-MV580A/MV550A after
Play List was deleted. recorded scenes have been deleted and the message disappears.
cleared. The specifications stipulate that
a play list with no scene on it cannot be
held: If all registered scenes have been
deleted, the play list will also be deleted.
Play Lists over limit. Appears if an attempt is made to create a Delete unnecessary scenes before
new play list or edit play list after the creating a new play list or editing
number of registered play lists has play list.
reached the upper limit (99) that is
defined by the DVD video recording
format.
Same scenes on PlayList will This message appears during user Choose “YES” and designate it to
be deleted. operation, if even one play list has been delete selected scenes.
Delete scenes? created during scene deletion. This
YES NO message does not appear when a scene is
deleted from play list.
Scenes over limit. Appears if an attempt is made to register Delete unnecessary scenes from play
Cannot add scenes. a new scene in play list, with the list before adding a new scene to it.
specified 999 upper limit scenes
registered. [Refer to *1 page 4-12]
Scenes over limit. Appears if an attempt is made to divide a Delete unnecessary scenes before
Cannot divide scenes. scene with the specified 999 upper limit dividing a scene.
scenes registered, or the number of
scenes will exceed 999 with division.
[Refer to *1 page 4-12]

4 - 19
Troubleshooting > Messages and Troubleshooting
Message
Scenes over limit.
Cannot move scenes.
Stop processing.
There was no scene which
can be deleted.
This card cannot be used.
Please replace card.
This disc cannot be used.
Please replace disc.
This disc is recorded by the
PAL system.
Please replace disc.
Top scenes cannot be
divided.
UNFORMAT DISC
Cause/condition for
Troubleshooting
message to appear
Appears if an attempt is made to move a Delete unnecessary scenes before
scene at the upper limit of 999 scenes moving scenes.
registered, or the number of scenes will
exceed 999 by moving a scene. [Refer to
*1 page 4-12]
This message appears during operation Operate DZ-MV580A/MV550A after
process. It will appear when user the message disappears.
interrupted any process by pressing the
stop/cancel button when processing
multiple scenes, etc.
Appears when only multiple locked Use the Disc Navigation function to
scenes were selected using the Disc unlock the scenes, and then restart
Navigation function, and deleting them operation.
was attempted.
Appears when a card other than SD Insert an SD memory card or
memory card or MultiMediaCard was MultiMediaCard.
loaded.
Appears when a type of disc that cannot Check the type of disc and insert a
be used on DZ-MV580A/MV550A was disc usable on DZ-MV580A/MV550A.
loaded.
Appears when a disc recorded in the PAL Use a disc recorded in the NTSC
system was loaded: The DZ-MV580A/ system.
MV550A is exclusively for the NTSC
system and does not comply with the
PAL system.
Appears when the first image of scene Stop trying to divide a scene.
was selected to divide the scene: The
specifications state that dividing a scene
at its top is not possible.
Appears when an unformatted or Format the disc (deleting all recorded
logically damaged disc was loaded. data), or replace the disc.
Also appears when a dirty disc was Clean the disc, or replace it.
loaded. [Refer to page 4-14]
If the message appears when a normal, Set the power switch to “POWER
formatted disc has been loaded, OFF” with the disc loaded, and then
condensation might have occurred on the leave the DZ-MV580A/MV550A in a
lens or drive of DZ-MV580A/MV550A. dry place until condensation
Condensation will occur when the DZ- disappears (usually 1-2 hours).
MV580A/MV550A is moved from a cold
place to a warm place.
4 - 20
Troubleshooting > Messages and Troubleshooting

Cause/condition for
Message
message to appear
Use AC adapter/charger. Appears if a battery is used when
finalizing a DVD-R disc. The
specifications state that DVD-R disc can
be finalized only when the AC adapter/
charger powers the DZ-MV580A/
MV550A.
Troubleshooting
Terminate the Disc Navigation
function, set the power switch to
“POWER OFF” with the disc loaded,
remove the battery, and then connect
the AC adapter/charger: Finalize the
disc again.

Use AC adapter/charger. Appears if a battery is used when
Turn off power. repairing video files. The specifications
state that video files can be repaired only
when the AC adapter/charger powers the
DZ-MV580A/MV550A.
VIDEO scene cannot be Appears if an attempt is made to copy
copied to card. video to card. The specifications state
that no video is unrecordable on card.
Write protected. Appears if a DVD-RAM disc that was
Check disc. write-protected for disc units by software
disc-protect function is loaded, or if an
attempt is made to record on write-
protected disc.
Write-protected. Appears when an SD memory card
Check card. whose erasure prevention switch was
locked is loaded.
Set the power switch to “POWER
OFF” with the disc loaded, remove
the battery, and then connect the AC
adapter/charger.
[Refer to *3 page 4-14]
Stop trying to copy a video, or select
photos and execute copy.
Release the software disc-protect.
Unlock the erasure prevention switch
of SD memory card.

Note:
The listed messages are subject to change without notice for improvement of performance.

4 - 21
 Troubleshooting > Self-Diagnosis Function and Troubleshooting

4-5 Self-Diagnosis Function and Troubleshooting

Restriction:
The information included in this section is exclusively for service personnel. Do not disclose it to
persons other than service engineers.

The DZ-MV580A/MV550A is equipped with a self-diagnosis function: If it detects a problem when

power is turned on or during operation, it will display a message, replace the content of problem
with an error code (4-digit alphanumeric characters), and then store it in flash memory.

4-5-1 Message displayed by self-diagnosis function

There are two types of message displayed when the self-diagnosis function detects problems:
messages for minor problems, and messages for serious problems.

Information:
The messages of self-diagnosis function will be displayed until the power switch is set to “POWER
OFF” or the disc is removed, regardless of whether there is a minor or serious problem.

(1) Messages for minor problems

These messages appear when troubleshooting is likely
possible for the problem detected when power was turned
on, following the procedure below. ! Error has occurred.
Procedure when message shown in Fig. 4-5-1 appears:
Please restart.
Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, reconnect the AC
adapter/charger or battery, and then set the power
switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO (disc)”.
Procedure when message shown in Fig. 4-5-2 appears:
Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, press the DISC
Fig. 4-5-1 Message for Minor Problem
EJECT button, and then reinsert the disc. After that, set
(1/2)
the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO (disc)”.
If the problem is handled by the procedure shown above,
servicing is not necessary in almost all cases. However, if
the DZ-MV580A/MV550A cannot be restored from the ! Error has occurred.
problem or the same problem recurs, appropriate servicing
Please reinsert a disc.
will be required.
The information on minor problems will be stored in flash
memory as error codes (4-digit alphanumeric characters),
whether or not the DZ-MV580A/MV550A is restored from
the problems. See “4-5-2 Error codes stored in flash
Fig. 4-5-2 Message for Minor Problem
memory” for how to display the stored error codes.
(2/2)

4 - 22
 Troubleshooting > Self-Diagnosis Function and Troubleshooting

(2) Messages for serious problems

These messages appear when solving the problem detected
when power is turned on or during operation is not likely by
turning power on again or reloading the disc: Error codes
! Error has occurred.
(4-digit alphanumeric characters) will directly appear, and
similar messages will appear if a problem from the same Error code No. 1100
cause occurs three times consecutively during operation. Please read the manual.
If messages for serious problems appear, perform
troubleshooting according to “4-5-3 Major error codes and
troubleshooting”.
The error codes appearing with messages will be stored in Fig. 4-5-3 Example of Message for
flash memory. See “4-5-2 Error codes stored in flash Serious Problem
memory” for how to display the stored error codes. (displayed in modes other than during
power on or recording)

ERROR : 1100

Fig. 4-5-4 Example of Message for

Serious Problem
(displayed during recording)

4 - 23
 Troubleshooting > Self-Diagnosis Function and Troubleshooting

4-5-2 Error codes stored in flash memory

(1) Displaying error codes and clearing them
Display method Error codes
1) Use the battery or AC adapter/charger to power DZ-
MV580A/MV550A, and then set the power switch to
“VIDEO”.
2) Display the error using the following button operation:
Press the SELECT button and release it; then, within 0.5
second, simultaneously hold down the SELECT and
FOCUS buttons for at least 3 seconds. 1100
Display clearing method 0400
1) Press the DISPLAY button.
After displaying and checking error code, be sure to clear Fig. 4-5-5 Example of Error Code
the error code display: If you neglect this, the error code Display
will always be displayed.

(2) Details of error code display

1) Error codes of 2 problems are displayed one above the
other.
The error code of the latest problem appears in the upper
row, and the error code of the problem that occurred
before appears in the lower row. However, when the
same problem occurs continuously, it will be judged as
one problem, and the same error code will not appear
continuously.
2) If only one error code is stored in flash memory, the error
code will appear in the upper row, and “0000” will appear
in the lower row.
3) If no error code is stored in flash memory, “0000” will
appear in both rows.

4 - 24
 Troubleshooting > Self-Diagnosis Function and Troubleshooting

4-5-3 Major error codes and troubleshooting

Table 4-5-1 shows the error codes that are likely to frequently appear, and troubleshooting when
they appear.
If error codes other than those listed in Table 4-5-1 appear, check with the factory for
troubleshooting.
Table 4-5-1 Major Error Codes and Troubleshooting (1/2)
Error code Contents of problem Troubleshooting
0400 Recognition of disc failed. 1) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, reattach the
battery or AC adapter/charger, and then set the power
1100 Reading of data from disc failed. switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO” (disc).
Take care not to subject DZ-MV580A/MV550A to
impact or vibrations at this time.
2) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, remove the
disc and check whether or not it is dirty, scratched or
distorted. If it is dirty, clean it referring to the next
page, and then reload it. If it is scratched or distorted,
use another disc.
Then set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO”
(disc).
3) Replace the disc without regard as to whether it is
dirty, scratched or distorted.
10AE Disc physically damaged, i.g., Replace the disc.
10AF scratched or distorted.
0280 The optical pickup in disc drive unit 1) Check the ambient temperature.
failed to move. 2) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, remove the
2881 Recognition of disc failed. [This disc and check whether or not it is dirty, scratched or
message is likely to appear frequently distorted. If it is dirty, clean it, and then reload it. If it
when the ambient temperature is too is scratched or distorted, replace the disc.
low (0°C or less)]. Then set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO”
(disc).

Disc cleaning method:

Use soft cloth to clean
from inner to outer
circumference in
axial direction.

[Never use solvent.]

3) Check to see whether or not condensation has

occurred. If condensation has occurred, set the power
switch to “POWER OFF” with the disc loaded, and
then leave the DZ-MV580A/MV550A in a dry place for
1-2 hours.
4) Replace the disc.

4 - 25
Troubleshooting > Self-Diagnosis Function and Troubleshooting

Error code Contents of problem Troubleshooting

3122 Recording on DVD-RAM disc failed. 1) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, reattach the
battery or AC adapter/charger, and then set the power
3126 Writing data file to disc failed. switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO” (disc).
3133 Take care not to subject DZ-MV580A/MV550A to
7601 It takes much more time than impact or vibrations at this time.
necessary to process start or end of 2) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, remove the
recording (timeout error). disc and check whether or not it is dirty, scratched or
distorted. If it is dirty, clean it referring to the next
7890 Recording on DVD-R disc failed. page, and then reload it. If it is scratched or distorted,
use another disc.
Then set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO”
(disc).
3) Replace the disc without regard as to whether it is
dirty, scratched or distorted.
7791 Formatting DVD-RAM disc failed. Format it again, or replace the disc.
3105 When recording photo, writing data to 1) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, reattach the
disc failed. battery or AC adapter/charger, and then set the power
E000 Writing data to disc failed. switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO” (disc).
EC87 Abnormal stop during reading or Take care not to subject DZ-MV580A/MV550A to
writing of data from/to disc. impact or vibrations at this time.
F100 Buffer has overflowed during 2) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, remove the
recording. disc and check whether or not it is dirty, scratched or
F526 When starting recording, reading of distorted. If it is dirty, clean it, and then reload it. If it
data file on disc failed. is scratched or distorted, replace the disc.
F571 When recording photo, writing data to Then set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO”
disc failed. (disc).
F572 When recording video, writing data to 3) When using DVD-R disc:
F573 disc failed. Replace the disc without regard as to whether it is
F600 Backup error dirty, scratched or distorted.
F700 No response from disc drive even when When using DVD-RAM disc:
3 minutes has elapsed (drive timeout Initialize the disc (deleting all data recorded on
error). disc), or replace the disc.
F924 Recording failed
FB24 Initialization at start of recording
failed.
FB34 While recording mode was being
transferred to recording pause, writing
data to disc failed.
FB44 During processing of buffer overflow
error, writing data to disc failed.

4 - 26
 Troubleshooting > Checking Versions of Firmware and Updating

4-6 Checking Versions of Firmware and Updating

The DZ-MV580A/MV550A stores the 4 types of firmware shown in Table 4-6-1 in flash memory.
These firmware programs will be updated whenever necessary to improve the performance of DZ-
MV580A/MV550A.
Check to see whether any defects in DZ-MV580A/MV550A can be eliminated by updating any
firmware programs: If improvement is likely, update them.

Information:
If any corrections in firmware are made at the factory, the information on how to obtain the
firmware data and create a disc or card containing upgraded firmware will be reported on service
bulletin, etc.

Table 4-6-1 List of DZ-MV580A/MV550A Firmware Programs

Type of firmware Description Remarks
System firmware Software that drives SH CPU: Controls the operation of
entire system, including recording, playback, Disc
Navigation, connections with external device
Camera microprocessor Controls the operation of camera block (including optical Does not require
firmware system), clock, battery, input/output updating
Drive main firmware These programs control the DVD disc drive system
Drive core firmware (mechanism block)

4-6-1 Checking firmware versions

(1) Purpose
When checking whether updating firmware is needed or not, use the following procedure to view
the information display or version display screen (see Fig. 4-6-1) and check the version number.
Only the titles at top left of screens will be different when no disc is loaded or disc is loaded; the
other display contents will be the same.

(2) Version display/clear method

Display method
1) Connect the battery or AC adapter/charger to power the DZ-MV580A/MV550A.
2) Set the power switch to “VIDEO” to set DZ-MV580A/MV550A to the recording pause status.
Operate DZ-MV580A/MV550A while viewing the LCD screen or viewfinder from this point.
3) When a disc is loaded, press the DISC NAVIGATION button to display the thumbnail display
screen: This step is not necessary if no disc is loaded.
4) Operate the following buttons to view the detaill display screen (with no disc loaded) or version
display screen (with disc loaded):
Tilt the joystick up and hold it, then simultaneously press the SELECT button and REC buttons.
Display clearing method
1) Press the stop/cancel button to restore the thumbnail display screen. To return to the normal
screen, press the DISC NAVIGATION button.

4 - 27
 Troubleshooting > Checking Versions of Firmware and Updating

(3) Details of detaill/version display screens When no disc is loaded

Table 4-6-2 Details of Information/Version Display Screens Detail

Item Display contents Model: DZ-MV5-NTSC

Model Model name System: Ver. x.xx
Date: xxxx/xx/xx xx:xx:xx
System Ver. Version number of system firmware Cam: Ver. x.xx
Date Date/time when system firmware was created Drive (Main): xxxx.xx.xx. REV
Cam Ver. Version number of Camera microprocessor Drive (Core): xxxx.xx.xx. REV
firmware
RETURN
Drive (Main) Version number of drive main firmware
Drive (Core) Version number of drive core firmware

When disc is loaded

Information:
Display ×××× on subsequent screen shows the numbers or Version
alphabets.
Model: DZ-MV5-NTSC
System: Ver. x.xx
Date: xxxx/xx/xx xx:xx:xx
Cam: Ver. x.xx
Drive (Main): xxxx.xx.xx. REV
Drive (Core): xxxx.xx.xx. REV

RETURN

Fig. 4-6-1

4-6-2 Updating firmware

(1) Purpose
If you receive information from the factory that updating
firmware is needed, you should do it to improve the
performance, functions and operability of DZ-MV580A/
MV550A.

4 - 28
 Troubleshooting > Checking Versions of Firmware and Updating

(2) Procedure for updating

1) Acquire the data for updating of firmware and create a disc or card for updating. Information on
how to obtain the firmware data and create a disc/card containing upgraded firmware will be
reported on service bulletin, etc.
2) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, and then use the AC adapter/charger to power the DZ-
MV580A/MV550A. A battery cannot be used because it may interrupt power of DZ-MV580A/
MV550A during work.
3) Insert the disc/card for updating firmware.
4) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF” when using a disc for updating, or to “[CARD]PHOTO”
when using a card for updating.
5) After approx. 20 seconds, the updating start screen (Fig. 4-6-2) will appear, and the firmware
programs will be automatically updated thereafter. During updating, the screens showing that
designated firmware program is being updated will appear, followed by the screen showing that
updating is complete.
However, not all firmware programs need updating every time: The same version screen will
appear for firmware programs that do not require updating.
6) When all required updating is complete, the screen for verifying the version of updated firmware
will appear, and the updated firmware will be displayed in red.
7) To complete updating, set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, and then remove the disc/card for
updating.

Updating Start Screen System Update Screen Drive (Main) Update Screen

Firmware Update Firmware Update Firmware Update

Updating system. Updating drive (Main).

Start Firmware update.
Please wait about 2 minutes.

Do not turn off power. Do not turn off power.

Drive (Core) Update Screen Updating Completed Screen Screen of Verifying the Version

Firmware Update Firmware Update Firmware Update

Updating drive (Core). Model: DZ-MV5-NTSC

Firmware updated. System: Ver. ×.××
Please wait about 20 seconds.
Drive (Main): ××××.××.××.REV
Do not turn off power. Drive (Core): ××××.××.××.REV

Turn off power

Same Version Screen

Firmware Update

Same revision.
Cannot update.

Fig. 4-6-2
4 - 29
 Troubleshooting > Trouble Diagnosis

4-7 Trouble Diagnosis

Information:
1) Use the DZ-ACS1 adapter/charger to power DZ-MV580A/MV550A for trouble diagnosis.
2) The trouble diagnosis table was prepared presupposing that the circuit boards have been
normally attached and connected. Therefore, make sure beforehand that the circuit boards are
correctly connected, that connectors and cables are not damaged, and that the status of their
connections is correct.

Prohibition:
During trouble diagnosis, never look directly into the objective lens of optical pickup block in disc drive
unit, and take great care that the reflected laser beam does not enter your eye.

4-7-1 Trouble diagnosis table

Interpreting the trouble diagnosis table:
1) Search for the defective symptom. If there are multiple check points or multiple details of check
for one symptom, check the items from the top down.
2) Set the DZ-MV580A/MV550A to a service position that matches the symptom. There are four
service positions (A)-(D) for DZ-MV580A/MV550A. Set to the appropriate service position,
referring to “Disassembly/reassembly to enable service position”.
If only dashes — are entered in the service position column, trouble diagnosis is possible without
disassembling the DZ-MV580A/MV550A.
3) Connect the measurement terminals to the check points, and collate the results with the details
of check.
Letters in brackets [ ] that follow the check points show the name and side of circuit board.
Example: [MAN-A] shows that the check point exists on side A of MAN-H/MAN circuit board.

Information:
The MAN-H/MAN or AEL-H/AEL circuit board has some check points to which no terminals of test
equipment can be directly connected even when the DZ-MV580A/MV550A is set to a service
position.
Solder a lead wire of approx. 10 cm to such check points, referring to “Disassembly/reassembly to
enable service position” and “circuit board diagrams”. When trouble diagnosis is complete, be sure
to remove the lead wire.

4) Perform troubleshooting according to the check results, referring to the troubleshooting columns.

4 - 30
 Troubleshooting > Trouble Diagnosis

Table 4-7-1 Trouble Diagnosis Table

Service Troubleshooting due to
Symptom Check points Detail of check
position check results
No power (A) F0501 [MAN-B] Is fuse blown? Yes: Replace MAN-H/
F0502 [MAN-B] MAN circuit board.
F0503 [MAN-B]
F0504 [MAN-B]
TL0504 [MAN-B] Is the voltage approx. 3.2 V No: Replace MAN-H/
DC (REG ON) when the MAN circuit board.
power switch is set to
"VIDEO" or "PHOTO" from
"POWER OFF"?
IC1503- 53 to 56 Can approx. 3 V DC (SYS3V)
[MAN-B] (Do not be confirmed?
solder lead wire)
TL0510 [MAN-A] Can approx. 1.5 V DC
(C1.6V) be confirmed?
TL0511 [MAN-B] Can approx. 3.2 V DC
(CAM3V) be confirmed?
TL0512 [MAN-A] Can approx. 4.8 V DC
(CAM5V) be confirmed?
TL0513 [MAN-A] Can approx. 3 V DC (D3V)
be confirmed?
TL0515 [MAN-A] Can approx. 5 V DC (D5V)
be confirmed?
TL0517 [MAN-A] Can approx. 2.5 V DC
(D2.5V) be confirmed?
TL0518 [MAN-B] Can approx. 15 V DC (C15V)
be confirmed?
Date/time is (B) TL7041 [AEL-B] Can approx. 3 V DC (B/U3V) Yes: Replace MAN-H/
incorrect be confirmed? MAN circuit board.
No: Replace BA1801.
Auto-focus does ----- ----- Even if manual focus is set Yes: Replace lens unit.
not operate. and +/- buttons are operated, No: Replace MAN-H/
focus is not correct, and MAN circuit board.
when power is turned on
again, abnormal sound is
heard from the lens and it
takes more than 20 seconds
before an image appears.
No zoom works ----- ----- No zoom is operated by the Yes: Replace lens unit.
even if zoom lever remote control, and when
is operated. power is turned on again,
abnormal sound is heard
from the lens and it takes
more than 20 seconds before
an image appears.
(A) TL1543 [MAN-B] Can change in voltage be Yes: Replace MAN-H/
confirmed when lever is MAN circuit board.
operated (T/W)? No: Replace rear cover.

4 - 31
 Troubleshooting > Trouble Diagnosis

Service Troubleshooting due to

Symptom Check points Detail of check
position check results
DISC EJECT (A) TL1547 [MAN-B] Can change in voltage be Yes: Replace MAN-H/
button does not confirmed when button is MAN circuit board.
operate operated (EJECT SW)? No: Replace rear cover.
REC button does (B) TL0522 [MAN-A] Can change in voltage be
not operate confirmed when button
(REC) is pressed?
Left button/ (C) TL7030 [AEL-B] Can change in voltage be Yes: Replace MAN-H/
joystick does not confirmed when button/ MAN circuit board.
operate joystick (KEY1) is moved?} No: Side case-L or parts
on the SWL2 circuit
board faulty.
QUICK MODE (C) TL7028 [AEL-B] Can change in voltage be Yes: Replace MAN-H/
switch does not confirmed when switch MAN circuit board.
operate (KEY2) is moved? No: Replace SW8017 on
SWL3 circuit board.
No image on LCD ----- ----- Does backlight turn on? Yes: Replace LCD unit.
monitor (D) TL3418 [LCD] Can approx. 5 V DC (INV5V) Yes: Q3451 or Q3452
be confirmed? and its peripheral
circuits are faulty.
No: Replace MAN-H/
MAN circuit board.
No image in (C) TL3715 [AEL-B] Can video signal (EVF-G) be Yes: Replace EVF unit.
viewfinder (EVF) Close LCD confirmed? No: Replace IC3701.
monitor
Block noise ----- ----- ---------- Replace MAN-H/MAN
appears during circuit board.
video recording
Camera recorded (B) TL2084 [MAN-A] Can sensor drive pulses (V1- No: Replace MAN-H/
image is abnormal TL2085 [MAN-A] 4, H1, H2, RG) be confirmed? MAN circuit board.
TL2086 [MAN-A]
TL2089 [MAN-A]
TL2090 [MAN-A]
TL2091 [MAN-A]
TL2095 [MAN-A]
(B) TL2082 [MAN-A] Can video signal (CCD-OUT) Yes: Replace MAN-H/
be confirmed? MAN circuit board.
No: With DZ-MV580A,
replace IC1001.
With DZ-MV550A,
replace lens unit.
No image from AV ----- ----- Does image appear on LCD No: Replace MAN-H/
input/output monitor or in EVF? MAN circuit board.
terminal (B) TL6010 [MAN-B] Can video signal (VIDEO) be Yes: Replace MAN-H/
confirmed? MAN circuit board.
No: IC6103 and its
peripheral circuits
are faulty.

4 - 32
 Troubleshooting > Trouble Diagnosis

Service Troubleshooting due to

Symptom Check points Detail of check
position check results
No sound from (C) TL1534 [MAN-B] Can audio signal (SP_OUT+, Yes: Replace disc cover.
speaker TL1535 [MAN-B] SP_OUT-) be confirmed? No: IC6103 and its
peripheral circuits
are faulty.
No audio from AV (B) TL6006 [MAN-B] Can audio signal (AUD-L, Yes: Replace MAN-H/
input/output TL6009 [MAN-B] AUD-R) be confirmed? MAN circuit board.
terminal No: IC6103 and its
peripheral circuits
are faulty.
Audio from built- (B) IC6101-1, 7, 8, 14 Can audio signal (MIC_INL, No: Built-in
in microphone [AEL-A] MIC_INR) be confirmed? microphone, or
cannot be recorded (Do not solder lead IC6101 and its
wire) peripheral circuits
are faulty.
(B) TL6101 [AEL-B] Can audio signal (MIC_INL, Yes: IC6201 or its
TL6102 [AEL-B] MIC_INR) be confirmed? peripheral circuits
are faulty.
No: Q6101-6104,
Q6108, Q6109,
Q6207, Q6208 or
their peripheral
circuits are
faulty.
Audio from (B) IC6201-3, 4 Can audio signal Yes: IC6201 or its
external [AEL-A] (EXTMIC_LCH, peripheral circuits
microphone cannot (Do not solder lead EXTMIC_RCH) be are faulty.
be recorded wire) confirmed? No: Replace MAN-H/
MAN circuit
board.
Even if a normal ----- ----- ---------- Replace disc drive unit.
disc is inserted,
message "DISC
ACCESS"
continues to
appear, and the
disc is not
recognized.
Message "NO ----- ----- ---------- If the DRF-H/DRF circuit
DISC" appears board is not damaged or
approx. 1 second its connection status is
after a normal disc normal, replace disc drive
is inserted. unit.
Message "NO ----- ----- ---------- Replace disc drive unit.
DISC" appears
within 10 seconds
after a normal disc
is inserted.

4 - 33
 Troubleshooting > Trouble Diagnosis

Service Troubleshooting due to

Symptom Check points Detail of check
position check results
Even when a disc ----- ----- ---------- Replace disc drive unit.
not protected is
inserted, message
"Write protected.
Check disc"
appears.
Even when a ----- ----- ----------
formatted disc is
inserted, message
"Disc is not
formatted"
appears.

4 - 34
 Troubleshooting > Trouble Diagnosis

4-7-2 Disassembly/reassembly to enable service position

Prohibition
Be sure to disconnect the AC adapter/charger or battery from the DZ-MV580A/MV550A.
The DZ-MV580A/MV550A has a built-in laser emitter block. Never look into it: If Laser beam
strikes your eye, it could cause serious vision damage.

Information:
Numbers in diagrams are step numbers for setting procedure. Letters in [ ] show the types of screw.
Letters in brackets ( ) show the name of parts.

(1) Setting to service position (A)

Service position (A) is mainly used for trouble
diagnosis of the power supply system and the
system of disc cover/operation buttons on side
case-R. Perform trouble diagnosis using the
check points on MAN-H/MAN circuit board. LEAD
WIRES

Remove the MAN-H/MAN circuit board in

advance, referring to “5. Disassembly and
Reassembly”.

1) Solder a lead wire of approx. 10 cm to the LEAD

MAN-H/MAN WIRES
check points (except for IC pins) on side A of CIRCUIT
BOARD
MAN-H/MAN circuit board, referring to “4-7-
1 Trouble diagnosis table” and “C-1 MAN-H/ Fig. 4-7-1 Service Position (A)
MAN” circuit board diagram. (See Fig. 4-7-2)

MAN-H/MAN TL0522
TL0510
Ciruit Board (Side A) TL0513
TL0515

TL2090 TL2085 TL2086 TL2082

TL2089 TL2091 TL2084 TL2095 TL0512
TL0517

: Check point (TL: Test land)

: Lead wire

Fig. 4-7-2 Lead wire soldering

4 - 35
 Troubleshooting > Trouble Diagnosis

2) Attach the MAN-H/MAN circuit board independently to the frame, and connect the DRF-H/DRF
circuit board to it.
3) Assemble the USB holder, USB-H/USB circuit board and rear cover.
4) Assemble the disc cover so that hinge 1 of side case-R fits into point 2 at the top of inside of disc
cover. Do not incline the disc cover at this time: Inclining the cover when assembling it could
break the switch inside the cover.

Note:
Attach the MAN-H/MAN circuit board independently of the frame only when setting to service
position (A).
When setting to service position (B) or during normal assembly, be sure to connect the AEL-H/AEL
circuit board to MAN-H/MAN circuit board first, and then attach them to the frame.
If the AEL-H/AEL circuit board is connected to MAN-H/MAN circuit board that is already attached
to the frame, connection error may occur, or the circuit boards or frame could be damaged.

3) [F] (h)
(f)
2

(b) 1
3) [M]
2) (c) (g)
4) (i)
2) 3)

(n)

3) [A]
(b) (j)
2) [G] (k)
3) [F] (a) (h) 4) [F]
(i) 4) [F]
3) (e) (g)
(a) (m)

2) [G] 3) (d)
4) Correct Incorrect Incorrect

[A] M1.7x4 (Black)

(a) MAN-H/MAN circuit board
(b) Frame
(c) DRF-H/DRF circuit board [F] M1.6x2.5 (Black)
(d) USB holder Switch
Disc
(e) USB circuit board [G] M1.7x3 (Gold)
Installing and inclined disc cover
(f) Rear cover cover could damage the switch
in side the disc cover.
(g) Disc cover
[M] M1.7x3 (Black)
(h) Hinge of side case-R
(i) Flat cable
(j) Disc drive unit
(k) Loader
(m)Side case-R
(n) Heat sink rubber
Fig. 4-7-3 Setting to service position (A)

4 - 36
 Troubleshooting > Trouble Diagnosis

(2) Setting to service position (B)

Service position (B) is mainly used for trouble LEAD
WIRES
diagnosis of the video and audio signal
systems.
Perform trouble diagnosis using the check
points on MAN-H/MAN and AEL-H/AEL
circuit
MAN-H/MAN
CIRCUIT
Remove the MAN-H/MAN and AEL-H/AEL BOARD
circuit boards in advance, referring to “5
Disassembly and Reassembly”.

1) Solder a lead wire of approx. 10 cm to the LEAD

WIRES
AEL-H/AEL
check points (except for IC pins) on side A/B CIRCUIT
of MAN-H/MAN circuit board and side B of BOARD
AEL-H/AEL circuit board, referring to “4-7-1
Trouble diagnosis table” and “C-1 MAN-H/
Fig. 4-7-4 Service Position (B)
MAN” and “C-2 AEL-H/AEL” circuit board
diagrams. (See Figs. 4-7-5, 4-7-6)

MAN-H/MAN TL0522 TL6101 TL3701(GND)

TL0510 TL6102 TL7041
Ciruit Board (Side A) TL0513 TL3715
TL0515 AEL-H/AEL
TL7030
TL7028 Ciruit Board (Side B)
TL2090 TL2085 TL2086 TL2082
TL2089 TL2091 TL2084 TL2095 TL0512
TL0517

: Check point (TL: Test land)

: Lead wire

Fig. 4-7-6 Lead wire soldering of AEL-H/AEL

MAN-H/MAN TL0520(GND)
citcuit board
Ciruit Board (Side B) TL0521(GND)
TL0518
TL0511TL1547
TL0504 TL1543
TL1534
TL1535
TL6006
TL6009 TL6010

: Check point (TL: Test land)

: Lead wire

Fig. 4-7-5 Lead wire soldering of MAN-H/MAN

citcuit board

4 - 37
 Troubleshooting > Trouble Diagnosis

(e)
2) Assemble the MAN-H/MAN and AEL-H/AEL
circuit boards on the frame. (c) [G] M1.7x3 (Gold)

3) Assemble the SEH-H/SEH circuit board and

[H] M1.6x2 (Gold)
accessory shoe. (See Fig. 4-7-7) 3) [H]
2)
4) Assemble the USB holder, USB-H/USB 2)
circuit board, rear cover and EVF unit.(See (f)
Fig. 4-7-8) 3) [G]

5) Assemble the disc cover so that hinge 1 of

2) [G]
side case-R fits into point 2 at the top of
inside of disc cover. Do not incline the disc 3) (d)

cover at this time: Inclining the cover when (a)

2) [G]
assembling it could break the switch inside 2) [G]

the cover.
(b)
6) Assemble the front block.
Fig. 4-7-7 Setting to service position (B) -1/2-

(a) MAN-H/MAN circuit board

(b) AEL-H/AEL circuit board
(c) Frame
(d) SHE-H/SHE circuit board
(e) Accessory shoe 4) [F]
(f) Heat sink rubber (i)
4) [A]
(g) USB holder
(h) USB circuit board (j)
(i) Rear cover 4) [M]
(j) EVF unit 4)
(m)
(k) Disc cover 4)
(m)Hinge of side case-R 2
(n) Side case-R
(p) Flat cable 4) [A]
(q) Disc drive unit 1
(r) Loader (k)
5) (p)

4) [F]

(q)
4) (h) (c)
(r)
(a) 5) [F]
5) (m) 5) [F]
4) (g) (p) (k)
(u) (n)

[A] M1.7×4 (Black) Correct Incorrect Incorrect

6) [B] 6) [B] M1.7×4 (Silver)

6) B]
[F] M1.6×2.5 Switch
(Black) Disc
Installing and inclined disc cover
cover could damage the switch
[M] M1.7×3 (Black)
in side the disc cover.

Fig. 4-7-8 Setting to service position (B) -2/2-

4 - 38
 Troubleshooting > Trouble Diagnosis

(3) Setting to service position (C)

Service position (C) is mainly used for trouble AEL-H/AEL LEAD
diagnosis of the system of operation buttons on L-BLOCK CIRCUIT WIRES
BOARD
side case-L.
Perform trouble diagnosis using the check
points on MAN-H/MAN and AEL-H/AEL
circuit boards.

Set to service position (B) in advance.

1) Connect the L block to AEL-H/AEL circuit

SAF-H/SAF LEAD
board. (See Fig. 4-7-10) CIRCUIT WIRES
BOARD

Fig. 4-7-9 Service Position (C)

(a) L block (b)

(b) AEL-H/AEL circuit board

(a)

1)

1) (c)
1)

Fig. 4-7-10 Setting to service position (C)

4 - 39
 Troubleshooting > Trouble Diagnosis

(4) Setting to service position (D)

Service position (D) is used for trouble
diagnosis of the LCD monitor. LCD
CIRCUIT
BOARD
Remove the LCD case-U, MR circuit board and
fulcrum block in advance, referring to “5.
Disassembly and Reassembly”.

1) Connect the flat cable of fulcrum block to

LCD and AEL-H/AEL circuit boards.
2) Connect the MR circuit board to LCD circuit
board. MR
CIRCUIT
AEL-H/AEL FULCRUM BOARD
CIRCUIT BLOCK
BOARD

Fig. 4-7-11 Service Position (D)

(a) Fulcrum block

(b) LCD circuit board
(c) AEL-H/AEL circuit board
(d) MR circuit board (e)
(e) MAN-H/MAN circuit board

(b)

1) 1)

(c)

2)
(a)
(d)

Fig. 4-7-12 Setting to service position (D)

4 - 40
4-8 Procedure for Removing Disc from Faulty DZ-MV580A/
MV550A
4-8-1 Item to be checked
Connect the AC adapter/charger or charged battery pack (power supply), making sure the ACCESS
indicator turns off, and then press the DISC EJECT button again.
Note: Even with normal product, the disc cannot be removed while the ACCESS indicator is lit or
blinking.

Information:
Connect the AC adapter/charger or charged battery pack (power supply) before pressing the DISC
EJECT button.
The DISC EJECT button will work even if a power supply is not connected.

Prohibition
After the above check, be sure to disconnect the AC adapter/charger of battery from DVD-MV580A/
MV550A.
The DVD-MV580A/MV550A has a built-in laser emitter block. Never look into it: If laser beam
strikes your eye, it could cause serious vision damage.

4-8-2 How to remove disc

If the disc cannot be ejected after performing “4-8-1 Item to be checked”, remove it using the
procedure in this section.

Information:
Numbers in diagrams are step numbers of setting procedure, and letters in brackets [ ] show the
types of screw.

1) Turn the hood in the direction of the arrow

FILTER
to remove it. [A] M1.7x4 (Black)
PIECE LENS
2) Remove three screws [A], and then remove COVER
the filter piece, being careful not to scratch 1) SPACE SHEET
the lens surface with screwdriver at this DISC
COVER
time.
3) Remove the lens cover in the direction of the 2) [A]

arrow. 3)
HOOD
4) Remove the space sheet that covers the
opening for operating lock arm. LOCK ARM
5) Use a fine-tipped flat-bladed screwdriver,
etc. to move the lock arm in the direction of
the arrow, and then open the disc cover.

Fig.4-8-1
Information:
When reinstalling removed components, use
the reverse procedure to removal.
4 - 41
 Troubleshooting > Special Functions

4-9 Special Functions

Restriction:
The information included in this section is exclusively for service personnel: Do not disclose it to
persons other than service engineers.

4-9-1 Forced formatting of DVD-RAM disc

(1) Application/Symptom
Perform this procedure when the Disc Navigation screen does not start normally due to a defect in
data on disc and formatting is not possible by the procedure explained in instruction manual.

(2) Operational procedure

Caution:
1) Initialization will delete all data on disc: Copy the necessary files to PC, etc.
2) Do not turn power off or remove the disc during initialization: Such an interruption will make the
disc unusable.

1) Use the AC adapter/charger to power DZ-MV580A/

MV550A, and set the power switch to “VIDEO” or Use soft cloth to clean
from inner to outer
“PHOTO”. circumference in
axial direction.
Be sure to use the AC adapter/charger for formatting
disc: If power is interrupted during work, the disc could [Never use solvent.]
become unusable.
Fig. 4-9-1 Disc cleaning method
2) Make sure that the DVD-RAM disc to be formatted is
free from dirt or scratch. If the disc is dirty, clean it; if
the disc is scratched, replace it. Any dirt or scratch on
disc could disable normal formatting. (Fig. 4-9-1)
3) Insert the DVD-RAM disc to be formatted.
Format Disc
4) After the disc is recognized, operate the following buttons
to display the disc formatting screen (Fig. 4-9-2): ! Disc is not formated.
Hold down the SELECT, REC and + (plus) buttons Format the disc now?
simultaneously for at least 3 seconds
YES NO
5) Use the joystick to choose “YES” and press the center of
joystick:
ENTER
The initialization will start and message “Formatting ...”
will appear.
Fig. 4-9-2 Screen for Disc Formatting
6) When formatting is complete, message “Finished” will
appear for several seconds, and then the normal screen
will automatically be restored.

4 - 42
 Troubleshooting > Special Functions

4-9-2 EEPROM data backup and write

(1) Application
Perform this work whenever you replace the MAN-H/MAN circuit board on which the EEPROM is
mounted.
Create a backup file of the data in EEPROM to be replaced in a PC, and write the backup file to
new EEPROM: Some adjustment items that are performed after replacement can be omitted.
Refer to “6-3-2 List of Adjustments Needed After Replacing Major Components” for adjustment
items that can be omitted.

(2) Preparations
1) Connect the DZ-MV580A/MV550A, jig/tool and power supply as shown in Fig. 4-9-3.
Refer to “6-1-1 List of Jigs and Tools used when Creating Reference Data” and “6-1-2 Power
Supply and Materials for Creating Reference Data” for details on jig/tool and power supply in the
figure.
2) Copy the adjustment program to HDD of PC.
Refer to “6-1-5 Copy or Deleting Adjustment Program” for copying.
3) Start the adjustment program in order to display the adjustment menu screen on PC display.

Prohibition:
Completely assemble the DZ-MV580A/MV550A; create backup file of EEPROM data and write it
with only the adjustment cover removed (see Fig. 4-9-3).
Do not attempt to perform work with the DZ-MV580A/MV550A disassembled: Doing so is very
dangerous because the DZ-MV580A/MV550A incorporates high-voltage circuits and a laser emitter
block.

Note:
1) Always connect the Skylark connection jig before connecting the DC power cord to DZ-MV580A/
MV550A: Connecting the Skylark connection jig after powering the DZ-MV580A/MV550A could
cause a fault.
2) Connect the Skylark connection jig so that the lead wires from jig face up.

4 - 43
 Troubleshooting > Special Functions

REMOVE THE
ADJUSTMENT COVER
[Refer to "(1) Adjustment cover"
in "5-3 Disassembly".]
DC POWER
CORD
To AC OUTLET

SKYLARK
CONNECTION DC
JIG POWER POWER CABLE
(No. TP14161) SUPPLY
(5V/1A)
DZ-ACS1

RED BLK

PC
GND
(PIN 16) BLK
YEL RS-232C
CABLE

DSP-R JIG
SD WHT (No. 7099448)
RD
(PIN 20) (PIN 18)

Fig. 4-9-3 Connections when creating backup file of EEPROM data and writing

4 - 44
Troubleshooting > Special Functions

(3) Backup method ADJUST MENU screen

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

MODEL NAME: ××××

Information: ADJUST MENU

If it is not possible to back up the data in EEPROM to be DATA INITIALIZE 1

replaced because the DZ-MV580A/MV550A is not turned VIDEO LEVEL
BURST LEVEL
on, etc., replace the MAN-H/MAN circuit board, and then SAMPLING PULSE

refer to “6-4-1 Initial Data Write”. AUTO FUCUS

AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX

1) Choose DATA INITIALIZE on the ADJUST MENU

CHROMA GAIN
SPOT NOISE
screen. LCD
EVF
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen
to proceed with the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen.
3) Choose Original Data Backup on the DATA INITIALIZE 2 EXECUTE RETURN

MENU screen.
CONNECTION

DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen

Note: Data Initialize

Do not choose “Initial Data Write” on the DATA

FILE MENU
INITIALIZE MENU.
Refer to “6-4-1 Initial Data Write” after backup for Initial Data Write

“Initial Data Write”.

4) Click the EXECUTE button on DATA INITIALIZE Backup Data Write

MENU screen to proceed with the BACKUP FILE

SELECT screen.
3
5) From the BACKUP FILE SELECT screen, select or set
Original Data Backup

8
the names of folder and file in which the data is stored.
This section refers to the folder and file as “EEP” and
4 EXECUTE RETURN
“backup.eep” for explanation: Freely select and set easy-
to-understand names. CONNECTION

6) Click the SAVE button on BACKUP FILE SELECT BACKUP FILE SELECT screen
?
screen to start backup. Look in (T): EEP

The progress status can be confirmed using the

PROGRESS STATUS dialog. 5
6
7) When backup is complete, the BACKUP FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to File name (N): backup Save (S)

*.eep
File of type (T): Cancel

restore the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen.

PROGRESS STATUS dialog
8) Then click the RETURN buttons on each menu screen to EEPROM Data Backup

restore the MODEL SELECT screen, and click the EXIT

button on MODEL SELECT screen to exit the PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT

adjustment program.
BACKUP FINISHED dialog
9) Disconnect the DZ-MV580A/MV550A, jig/tool and power FINISHED

supply, and then replace the MAN-H/MAN circuit board. FINISHED READING DATA

OK 7

4 - 45
Troubleshooting > Special Functions

(4) Write method ADJUST MENU screen

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

MODEL NAME: ××××

Restrictions: ADJUST MENU

Never write data of any other product. DATA INITIALIZE 1

VIDEO LEVEL
The EEPROM data includes adjustment values, etc. that BURST LEVEL

are peculiar to that product: It is different for each SAMPLING PULSE

AUTO FUCUS
product even if the model is the same. AUTO IRIS CONTROL

If you write the data of another product by mistake, MATRIX

CHROMA GAIN
rewrite the correct data. SPOT NOISE
LCD
EVF
1) Choose DATA INITIALIZE on the ADJUST MENU
screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen 2 EXECUTE RETURN

to proceed with the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen. CONNECTION

3) Choose Backup Data Write on the DATA INITIALIZE
DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen
MENU screen.
Data Initialize
4) Click the EXECUTE button on DATA INITIALIZE
MENU screen to proceed with the WRITE FILE FILE MENU

SELECT screen. Initial Data Write

5) From WRITE FILE SELECT screen, select the folder
and file in which the data has previously been backed
up. Backup Data Write 3
This section refers to the folder and file as “EEP” and
“backup.eep” for explanation.
6) Click the OPEN button on WRITE FILE SELECT screen Original Data Backup

to start writing. 8

The progress status can be confirmed using the

4 EXECUTE RETURN
PROGRESS STATUS dialog.
7) When writing is complete, the INITIALIZATION CONNECTION

FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in

WRITE FILE SELECT screen
dialog to restore the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen. ?

Look in (T): EEP

8) Click the RETURN button on DATA INITIALIZE backup.eep 5
MENU screen to restore the ADJUST MENU screen,
and then perform adjustment according to “6-3-2 List of 6
Adjustments Needed After Replacing Major File name (N): backup.eep Open

Components”. File of type (T):

*.eep Cancel

PROGRESS STATUS dialog

DATA INITIALIZE

PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT

INITIALIZATION FINISHED dialog

FINISHED
FINISHED WRITING DATA

OK 7

4 - 46
 5 Disassembly and Reassembly
5-1 Items to Be Checked
(1) Checking Disc
Connect the AC adapter/charger or charged battery (power supply), and then press the DISC
EJECT button to make sure that no disc is inserted. After check, close the disc insertion block.
If the disc insertion block does not open normally, refer to “4-8 Procedure for Removing Disc from
Faulty DZ-MV580A/MV550A”.

Prohibition
After the above check, be sure to disconnect the AC adapter/charger or battery from the DZ-
MV580A/MV550A.
The DZ-MV580A/MV550A has a built-in laser emitter block. Never look into it: If Laser beam
strikes your eye, it could cause serious vision damage.

(2) Checking Card

Make sure that no card is loaded in the card slot. After check, close the card slot cover.

5-2 Order of Disassembly

Refer to “Disassembly Flowchart” in Fig. 5-2-1 for the order of removing components.
When reassembling components, use the reverse order to removal unless otherwise specified.

Note:
When replacing components, be sure to use only those shown in “Replacement Parts List”.

Information:
1) Board names suffixed with “-H” are for DZ-MV580A.
2) The procedures for disassembling and reassembling the DZ-MV580A and DZ-MV550A are the
same, except for the following components:
a) SHE-H circuit board
b) SHE circuit board
c) Accessory shoe
d) Lens unit (SEN-H circuit board, CCD image sensor, crystal filter, cushion)
3) The lens unit in DZ-MV550A includes components equivalent to cushion, crystal filter, CCD
image sensor and SEN-H circuit board, which are discrete from the lens unit in DZ-MV580A.

5 - 1
Disassembly and Reassembly > Order of Disassembly

Reading Disassembly Flowchart:

After locating the target component in the flowchart, remove all components of the target in
sequence, following the arrows (routes) from the top of flowchart. If multiple routes exist to the
target component from the top of flowchart, remove all the components on all the routes.

Parts Name Item No.

Adjustment cover 5-3

(1)

Food 5-3
Filter piece (2)
Lens cover

SAF-H/SAF 5-3 SWL3-H/SWL3 5-3 Side case-L

circuit board (3) circuit board (7)
L-Block

Side case-L LCD case-U Fulcrum cover-U

LCD Unit 5-3 MR circuit board 5-3 Fulcrum cover-B 5-3
SWL2 circuit board (8) Fulcrum block (9) Fulcrum unit (20)

Front block 5-3 Jack cover 5-3 LCD case-B 5-3

(4) (5) LCD circuit board (21)

FRT-H/FRT
circuit board 5-3 Front case
Microphone (6)
Microphone cover

USB holder
R-Block 5-3 Disc cover 5-3 USB-H/USB Hand strap 5-3
(4) (10) 5-3 (11)
circuit board (11)
Rear cover
EVF unit

DZ-MV580A
5-3 AEL-H/AEL 5-3 DZ-MV580A
SHE-H circuit board circuit board 5-3 Camera block GYR-H circuit board
Accessory shoe (12) (15) (16)
MAN-H/MAN Lens frame
circuit board Lens unit 5-3
Cushion (22)
DZ-MV550A Crystal filter
5-3 CCD image sensor
SHE circuit board (13) SEN-H circuit board

DZ-MV550A 5-3 DZ-MV550A

Accessory shoe (14) GYR circuit board 5-3
Lens frame (23)
Lens unit

5-3 Drive block 5-3 Loader

Link bracket DRF-H/DRF
(17) Side case-L (18)
circuit board 5-3
DVD Disc drive unit (19)
Lock unit
Frame

Fig. 5-2-1

5 - 2
 Disassembly and Reassembly > Disassembly

5-3 Disassembly

Information:
Numbers in disassembly procedure diagrams are step numbers for disassembling order, and letters
in brackets [ ] show the types of screw. Letters in brackets ( ) show the name of parts.

(1) Adjustment Cover (a) Adjustment cover

(b) LCD monitor
1) Open the LCD monitor (b). (c) Side case-L
2) Insert a fine-tipped flat-bladed screwdriver (d) Flat-bladed screwdriver
(d) into the groove of adjustment cover (a),
and remove the adjustment cover in the
direction of the arrow, being very careful not (b)
to scratch the adjustment cover or side
case-L (c) with screwdriver.

1)

(c)

(a)
(d) 2)

Fig. 5-3-1

(2) Hood, Filter Piece and Lens Cover (a) Hood

1) Turn the hood (a) in the direction of the (b) Filter piece
(c) Lens cover
arrow to remove it.
2) Remove three screws [A], and then remove (b) (c)
the filter piece (b), being careful not to
scratch the lens surface with screwdriver at 1)
this time. 3)
3) Remove the lens cover (c) in the direction of
the arrow. 2) [A]

(a)

[A] M1.7x4 (Black)

Fig. 5-3-2

5 - 3
 Disassembly and Reassembly > Disassembly

(3) SAF-H/SAF Circuit Board and L Block

1) Open the LCD monitor (c).
2) Remove three screws [A], two screws [N] and three screws [C].
3) Close the LCD monitor and open the L block (b) from the rear in the direction of the arrow:
Be careful not to damage the SAF-H/SAF circuit board (a) or flat cable between L block and R
block (d).
4) Remove the SAF-H/SAF circuit board. The SAF-H/SAF circuit board is a film-like board:
Do not bend or fold it.
5) Disconnect the flat cable between L and R blocks. Disconnect the flat cable between L and R
blocks: Do not forcibly pull out the flat cable from connectors at this time.
6) Remove the L block from R block (d) in the direction of the arrow.

(1)
(1) Unlock
(2) Pull
(a) SAF-H/SAF circuit board
(2)
(b) L block (d)
(c) LCD monitor
(d) R block
2) [C]

(b) 2) [A]
5)

(c)
2) [A]
4)

1) (a)
6)
Pattern no,
printed side

3)
2) [C]
2) [N]
Fig. 5-3-3 Right side
2) [N]

[A] M1.7x4 (Black)

[N] M1.7x4 (Silver)

2) [A] [C] M1.7x4 (Silver)

Fig. 5-3-4 Bottom Side

5 - 4
 Disassembly and Reassembly > Disassembly

(4) Front Block and R Block (a) Front block

(b) R block
1) Open the jack cover (c), and then remove one (c) Jack cover
screw [N]. (d) FRT-H/FRT circuit board
(e) AEL-H/AEL circuit board
2) Remove one screw [N].
3) Remove the FRT-H/FRT circuit board (d)
from AEL-H/AEL circuit board (e) in the (b)
direction of the arrow.
4) Remove the front block (a) from R block (b)
in the direction of the arrow.
(a)

4)

(e)
3)
1) [N]
(d)
[N] M1.7×4 (Silver)

2) [N]

(c)
Fig. 5-3-5

(5) Jack Cover (a) Jack cover (b)

1) Release the two tabs, and then remove the (b) Front block

jack cover (a).

Tabs

(a)

Fig. 5-3-6

(6) FRT-H/FRT circuit board, Microphone, (a) FRT-H/FRT circuit board

2) [D]
and Microphone Cover (b) Microphone
(c) Microphone cover (a)
FRT-H/FRT circuit board (a) (d) Front Case
1) Disconnect the flat cable from microphone.
2) Remove one screw [D], and then remove the
(d) 1)
FRT-H/FRT circuit board.
Microphone (b) and Microphone Cover (c)
3) Remove one screw [D], and then remove the 3) [D]

microphone and microphone cover from the

front case (d). (b)

(c)
[D] M1.7x4 (Black)

Fig. 5-3-7
5 - 5
 Disassembly and Reassembly > Disassembly

(7) SWL3-H/SWL3 Circuit Board

1) Unplug the connector. Be sure to hold the connector using tweezers, etc. when unplugging it.
Pulling the cable when unplugging the connector could cause wire disconnection.
2) Remove one screw [D].

Procedure and caution for reassembly

1) Insert the switch knob (b) on SWL3-H/SWL3 circuit board between the knobs (c) of L cover.
2) Pass the cable to be connected to the SWL3-H/SWL3 circuit board through cable holder (e) under
ground plate (d) and wire retaining slit (f) as shown in the figure, so that the cable is laid out
along the side case L and L cover as far as possible.

2) [D]
1)
(a) SWL3-H/SWL3 circuit board
(b) Switch knob (a)
(c) Knobs of L cover
[D] M1.7x4 (Black)
(d) Ground plate
(e) Cable Holder
(f) Wire retaining slit

(b)

(c)

(a)

(e)

(f)

(d)

Fig. 5-3-8

5 - 6
 Disassembly and Reassembly > Disassembly

(8) Side Case L, LCD Unit, and SWL2 Circuit Board

1) Unplug the connector. Be sure to hold the connector using tweezers, etc. when unplugging it.
Pulling the cable when unplugging the connector could cause wire disconnection.
2) Remove five screws [D].
3) Remove two screws [E], and then remove the LCD unit (b) and ground plate (d) from side case-L
(a).
4) Disconnect the one flat cable.
5) Remove two screws [D], and then remove the SWL2 circuit board (c).

Procedure and caution for reassembly

Pass the cable to be connected to the SWL3-H/SWL3 circuit board through the cable holder under
ground plate and the wire retaining slit as shown in Fig.5-3-8, making sure that the cable is laid out
along the side case L and L cover as far as possible.

Note:
Take great care when handling the LCD unit The LCD unit has an LCD panel that is a precision
component. Subjecting it to impact could result in a fault.

[D] M1.7x4 (Black) (1)

(1) Unlock
[E] M2x5 (Silver) (2) Pull
(2) (1)

1)
2) [D] (c)
4)

(a)
5) [D]

(f)

2) [D]

(a) Side case-L

(b) LCD unit (d) (e)
(c) SWL2 circuit board 3) [E]
(d) Ground plate (b)
(e) L cover
(f) SWL3-H/SWL3 circuit board
Fig. 5-3-9

5 - 7
 Disassembly and Reassembly > Disassembly

(9) LCD Case-U, MR Circuit Board, and Fulcrum Block

LCD Case-U (a)
1) Insert an awl (e), etc. into the screw hole, and turn the screw-hole bracket of fulcrum block 90° in
the direction of the arrow.
At this time, make no mistake with the turning direction: Turning in the wrong direction will
deform fulcrum cover U.
2) Turn the fulcrum block 90° in the direction of the arrow.
3) Remove three screws [B].
4) Release the six tabs, and then remove the LCD case-U in the direction of the arrow. The MR
sheet (f) will detach at this time: Take care not to lose it.
MR Circuit Board (b)
5) Disconnect the MR circuit board from the LCD circuit board (g).
6) Remove the MR circuit board in the direction of the arrow. The MR circuit board is a film-like
board: Do not bend or fold it.
Fulcrum Block (c)
7) Disconnect the one flat cable.
8) Remove the fulcrum block in the direction of the arrow.

(1)
(a) LCD case-U (e) 5) (1) Unlock
4) Tabs
(b) MR circuit board (b) (2) Pull
(c) fulcrum block (2) (1)
(d) LCD circuit board 1)
6) 4) Tabs
(e) Awl 90
(f) MR sheet (c) 3) [B]
2) (d)
(f)
90
7)
4)
(c)
8) 4) Tabs

(1) (a)
[B] M1.7x4 (Silver) (2)

(1) Unlock
(2) Pull
3) [B]

Fig. 5-3-10

5 - 8
 Disassembly and Reassembly > Disassembly

(10) Disc Cover

1) Remove the space sheet (b) that covers the opening for operating lock arm.
2) Use a fine-tipped flat-bladed screwdriver to move the lock arm (d) in the direction of the arrow to
open the disc cover (a).
3) Disconnect the one flat cable.
4) Open the card slot cover (g).
5) Remove four screws [F].
6) Remove the disc cover in the direction of the arrow: Be careful not to damage the flat cable (h)
that extends from the disc cover.

Procedure and caution for reassembly

1) Reinstall the disc cover so that the hinge 1 of side case-R fits into portion 2 at the inside top of
disc cover, and that the cover is not inclined. Installing and inclined disc cover could damage the
switch inside the disc cover.
2) Pass the flat cable extending from the disc cover through the gap between the frame and side
case-R, and then connect it to the MAN-H/MAN circuit board (f).

(a) Disc cover (h) Flat cable

(b) Space sheet (i) Hinge of side case-R
(c) Opening for operating lock arm (j) Frame
(d) Lock arm (k) Side case-R 1) (b) (d)
(e) AEL-H/AEL circuit board (m)Loader
(f) MAN-H/MAN circuit board (n) Disc drive unit
(g) Card slot cover (c)
2)
(a) (c)

(i) (e)

(f)
1
6)
3)
(h) (1) (1)
(a)
(1) Unlock
(2) (2)Pull
4) (g)
Fig. 5-3-11 Left Side

[F] M1.6x2.5 (Black) Correct Incorrect Incorrect

5) [F]

5) [F]

(j) (n)
(m) Disc Switch
(f)
cover
(i) Installing and inclined disc
cover could damage the switch
(h)
(a) in side the disc cover.
(k)
Fig. 5-3-12 Right Side
5 - 9
 Disassembly and Reassembly > Disassembly

(11) USB Holder, USB-H/USB Circuit Board, Rear Cover, EVF Unit, and Hand Strap

Note:
Before replacing the EVF unit, always perform “(1) BL DET Check” in “6-4-11 EVF”.

USB Holder (a) and USB-H/USB Circuit Board (b)

1) Remove one screw [F].
2) Disconnect the USB-H/USB circuit board from MAN-H/MAN circuit board (h).
3) Remove the USB-H/USB circuit board from USB holder in the direction of the arrow.
Rear Cover (c) and EVF Unit (d)
4) Remove the hand strap from side case-R (g).
5) Remove one screw [F] and one screw [A].
6) Disconnect the three flat cables, and then remove the rear cover along with the EVF unit.
7) Remove one screw [A], and then remove the EVF unit.
Hand Strap (e)
8) Remove screw [A], screw [D] and screw [M], and then remove the hand strap.

(d)
5) [F]
(c)
7) [A]

(f)
(e) 6)
8) [M]

8) [D] 6)

8) [A]

4) 5) [A]
(g)
[A] M1.7x4 (Black)

[D] M1.7x4 (Black)

[F] M1.6x2.5 (Black)

1) [F]
[M] M1.7x3 (Black)
(a) USB holder
(b) USB-H/USB Circuit Board (h) (a)
(c) Rear cover 3)
2) (b)
(d) EVF unit
(f) Hand strap plate
(g) Side case-R
(h) MAN-H/MAN circuit board
Fig. 5-3-13

5 - 10
 Disassembly and Reassembly > Disassembly

[G] M1.7x3 (Gold)

(12) SHE-H Circuit Board and Accessory
Shoe in DZ-MV580A (b)
[H] M1.6x2 (Gold)
1) Disconnect the SHE-H circuit board (a) from
AEL-H circuit board (c).
2) Disconnect the GYR-H (d) circuit board from 2) (d) 3) [H]
SHE-H circuit board.
3) Remove one screw [G], one screw [H], and
then remove the SHE-H circuit board along
with the accessory shoe (b).
4)
4) Disconnect the SHE-H circuit board from 3) [G]
accessory shoe.

(a) SHE-H circuit board

(b) Accessory shoe
(c) AEL-H circuit board
(d) GYR-H circuit board 1) (a)
(c)
Fig. 5-3-14

(13) SHE Circuit Board in DZ-MV550A 2) (c)

1) Disconnect the SHE circuit board (a) from

[G] M1.7x3 (Gold)
AEL circuit board (b).
2) Disconnect the GYR circuit board (c) from
SHE circuit board.
3) [G]
3) Remove one screw [G], and then remove the
SHE-H circuit board.

(a) SHE circuit board

(b) AEL circuit board
(c) GYR circuit board 1) (a)
(b)
Fig. 5-3-15

(14) Accessory Shoe in DZ-MV550A [H] M1.6x2 (Gold)

1) Remove one screw [H], and then remove the

accessory shoe (a).

(a)
(a) Accessory shoe

1) [H]

Fig. 5-3-16
5 - 11
Disassembly and Reassembly > Disassembly

(15) AEL-H/AEL and MAN-H/MAN Circuit Boards

Note:
Before replacing the MAN-H/MAN circuit board, always perform “4-9-2 EEPROM data backup
and write”.

1) Disconnect the two flat cables.

2) Disconnect the DRF-H/DRF circuit board (c) from MAN-H/MAN circuit board (b).
3) Remove three screws [G].
4) Remove the AEL-H/AEL circuit board (a) that is assembled with MAN-H/MAN circuit board in
the direction of the arrow: It may be difficult to remove these circuit boards, since the heat sink
rubbers (e) on MAN-H/MAN circuit board may stick to the frame (d).
5) Remove the AEL-H/AEL circuit board from MAN-H/MAN circuit board in the direction of the
arrow.

Note:
Do not scratch the surface of IC2009 or IC2010: The surfaces of IC2009 or IC2010 are silicon
substrate (silicon wafer) that is semi-conducting. Scratching them could cause fault in operation.

Procedure and caution for reassembly

1) Be sure to paste the two heat sink rubbers (e) on the MAN-H/MAN circuit board: Neglecting to
paste the heat sink rubber could cause a fault.
2) Connect the MAN-H/MAN circuit board and AEL-H/AEL circuit board, and then attach them to
the frame. If the MAN-H/MAN and AEL-H/AEL circuit boards are attached to the frame
independently, a connection fault could result.

(a) AEL-H/AEL circuit board

(b) MAN-H/MAN circuit board
(d) (c) DRF-H/DRF circuit board
(d) Frame
2) (c)
(e) Heat sink rubbers
1)
e
(b)
IC2010

IC2006
IC4106

e IC2009
IC4002
IC2010
3) [G]
DZ-MV580A
(a) (2) (1) Unlock
(2) Pull

(1)
(b)

[G] M1.7x3 (Gold) DZ-MV550A

3) [G] 5) 3) [G]
4)

Fig. 5-3-17
5 - 12
 Disassembly and Reassembly > Disassembly

(16) Camera Block

1) Remove two screws [F], and then remove the camera block (a).

Procedure and caution for reassembly

Fit the hook (c) of camera frame onto the square hole (d) in frame before tightening the screws.

Note:
Take great care when handling the camera block: The camera block contains the lens unit, which is
a precision component. Subjecting the lens unit to any impact could result in a fault.

(a) Camera block

(b) Frame
(d)
(c) hook of camera frame
(d) square hole in frame
(c)

(a)
(b)

1) [F]

1) [F] DZ-MV550A
DZ-MV580A

(a)

[F] M1.6x2.5 (Black)

1) [F] 1) [F]

Fig. 5-3-18

(17) Link Bracket

1) Remove two screws [H], and then remove (a) Link bracket

the link bracket (a). [H] M1.6x2 (Gold)

(a)

1) [H]

Fig. 5-3-19
5 - 13
 Disassembly and Reassembly > Disassembly

(18) Drive Block and Side Case-R

1) Remove five screws [F] and two screws [A], and then remove the drive block (a) from the side
case-R (b).

Note:
Take great care when handling the drive block: The drive block contains the disc drive unit, which
is a precision component. Do not subject the disc drive unit to any impact: Doing so could cause a
fault.

1) [F]
(a) Drive block
(b) Side case-R 1) [F]

(b) 1) [F]

1) [F]

[A] M1.7x4 (Black)

1) [A]

[F] M1.6x2.5 (Black)

(a)

Fig. 5-3-20 Left side

1) [A]

1) [F]

Fig. 5-3-21 Bottom side

5 - 14
 Disassembly and Reassembly > Disassembly

(19) Loader, DRF-H/DRF Circuit Board, Disc Drive Unit, Lock Unit, and Frame
Loader (a)
1) Remove two screws [L], and then remove the loader.
DRF-H/DRF Circuit Board (b) and Disc Drive Unit (c)
2) Remove three screws [K].
3) Disconnect the one flat cable.
4) Disconnect the DRF-H/DRF circuit board from DRV-R circuit board in disc drive unit.
Lock Unit (d) and Frame (e)
5) Remove one screw [H], and then remove the lock unit.

Note:
The disc drive unit is a precision component: Take great care when handling it. Do not subject the
disc drive unit to any impact: Doing so could cause a fault.

Procedure and caution for reassembly

Be sure to paste the heat sink rubber (f) on the frame: Neglecting to paste it could cause a fault.

(a) Loader
(b) DRF-H/DRF circuit board
(c) Disc drive unit
(d) Lock unit
(e) Frame (a) (1)
(f) Heat sink rubber (c)
(1) Unlock
(2) Pull
2) [K] (2) (1)
1) [J]

4) (b)

3)
2) [K]
5) [H]
(d)
[H] M1.6x2 (Gold)

[J] M1.7x3 (Black) (f)

[K] M1.7x1.8 (Gold)

(e)

Fig. 5-3-22

5 - 15
Disassembly and Reassembly > Disassembly

(20) Fulcrum Cover-U, Fulcrum Cover-B

(a) Fulcrum cover-U
and Fulcrum Unit (b) Fulcrum cover-B (c)
1) Remove two screws [P], and then remove the (c) Fulcrum unit
fulcrum cover-U (a) and fulcrum cover-B (b)
(b)
from the fulcrum unit (c).
(a)

1) [P]
[P] M1.6x3 (Black)

Fig. 5-3-23

(21) LCD Case-B and LCD Circuit Board (a)

LCD Case-B (a)
(c)
1) Remove the LCD case-B in the direction of
the arrow.
1)
LCD Circuit Board (b) 2)
2) Disconnect the one flat cable.
3) Release the two tabs, and then remove the
3) Tabs
LCD circuit board.
Be careful not to deform LCD frame (c) at
this time.
(b)

(1)
(a) LCD case-B (2)
(1) Unlock
(b) LCD circuit board (2) Pull
(c) LCD frame (1)

Fig. 5-3-24 LCD Case-B and LCD Circuit Board

Note: (c) LCD frame

1) Do not remove the mirror sheet (d), light (d) Mirror sheet
(e) Light guide plate
guide plate (e), diffusion sheet (f), prism (c)
(f) Diffusion sheet
sheets (g) or LCD panel (h) from the LCD (h) (g) Prism sheets
frame (c). (h) LCD panel
2) If the mirror sheet, light guide plate, (f)
Silver
diffusion sheet, prism sheets or LCD panel surface
becomes detached from the LCD frame,
(e)
assemble them as shown in Fig. 5-3-25.
(g)
(d)

A
B
C White
surface
A>B>C
Fig. 5-3-25 Assembling parts inside LCD frame
5 - 16
 Disassembly and Reassembly > Disassembly

(22) GYR-H Circuit Board, Lens Frame, Lens Unit, Cushion, Crystal Filter, CCD Image
Sensor, and SEN-H Circuit Board in DZ-MV580A
GYR-H Circuit Board (a)
1) Remove two screws [D], and then remove the GYR-H circuit board.
Lens Frame (b)
2) Remove one screw [D].
3) Release the two tabs.
4) Remove the lens frame in the direction of the arrow.
Lens Unit (c), Cushion (d) and Crystal Filter (e)
5) Remove two screws [L], and then remove the lens unit, cushion and crystal filter.
CCD Image Sensor (f) and SEN-H Circuit Board (g)
6) Unsolder the fourteen points of CCD image sensor terminals on SEN-H circuit board.

Note:
1) The lens unit, crystal filter and CCD image sensor are precision components: Take great care
when handling them. Adherence of dust, foreign object, fingerprint, etc. to them, scratches or
impact, could cause a fault.
2) Never use metal tweezers to handle the crystal filter: Doing so could cause a fault.

Procedure and caution for reassembly

1) Take care with the orientation of crystal filter when assembling it: Incorrect orientation of the
crystal filter could cause a fault.
2) When assembling the lens unit into lens frame, insert the flat cable (h) of lens unit inside the lens
frame.

(f) (g)

(c) 6)
(c)
(h) 5) [L]
(d)

(e) a
(b) b
(h) Transparent

1) [D] a>b
2) [D] Color

(a) GYR-H circuit board [D] M1.7x4 (Black)

(b) Lens frame
(a)
(c) Lens unit
(d) Cushion [L] M1.7x5 (Silver)
(e) Crystal filter
(f) CCD image sensor (b)
4)
(g) SEN-H circuit board 3) Tabs
(h) Flat cable
Fig. 5-3-26

5 - 17
 Disassembly and Reassembly > Disassembly

(23) GYR Circuit Board, Lens Frame, and

Lens Unit in DZ-MV550A
(a) GYR circuit board
(b) Lens frame
Information: (c) Lens unit
1) [D]
The DZ-MV550A lens unit is set as a service
component: It includes the parts equivalent to
cushion rubber, crystal filter, CCD image (b)
sensor and SEN-H circuit board of DZ- (a)

MV580A.

GYR Circuit Board (a)

1) Remove two screws [D], and then remove the
2) [D]
GYR circuit board.
Lens Frame (b) and Lens Unit (c)
2) Remove two screws [D], and then remove the [D] M1.7x4 (Black)
lens frame. (c)

Caution: Fig. 5-3-27

1) The lens unit is a precision component: Take
great care when handling it. Do not allow
any dust to adhere to it, and do not subject it
to damage or impact: Doing so could cause a
fault.
2) Do not disassemble the lens unit: Doing so
could cause a fault.

5 - 18
 6 Adjustment
6-1 Creating Reference Data
The reference data is necessary for adjustment: The adjustment program will not operate normally
without it. Before adjustment, be sure to create the reference data, using the same model (with
normal camera block) as the one to be adjusted.
See section 6-1-1 and subsequent sections for details.

Information:
1) The reference data is used to reduce the difference between environments of servicing site and
factory (color temperature of light box, etc.). Using the reference data will increase adjustment
accuracy.
2) The reference data is usually created once for each model because it is recorded on hard disk
drive (HDD) of PC with the adjustment program. However, creating reference data again is
necessary in the following cases:
a) When performing adjustment using a light box that is different from that used when the
reference data was created.
b) When performing maintenance of the light box used when creating the reference data
(replacing fluorescent light, etc.).
c) When performing adjustment using a C12 light balancing filter that is different from that used
when the reference data was created.
d) When deleting the folder containing the adjustment program from HDD.

Restrictions:
If the same model with normal camera block as the one to be adjusted is not available, the reference
data can be created by the following procedure. However, reference data created this way has been
prepared at the factory, assuming the environment of service workplace, and may not be suitable
for all service workplaces. Therefore, it is recommended that you create reference data using the
same model with normal camera block as that to be adjusted.
1) Store the adjustment program on HDD, referring to “6-1-5 Copy or Deleting Adjustment
Program”.
2) Start up Explorer and open the refdata folder in map04w folder.
3) Refer to the following table to check the reference data file name of the model to be adjusted.
4) Copy the file with the same name as the reference data file name checked in step 3) in refdata
folder to map04w folder.

Model Name of reference data file

DZ-MV580A m580ae.dat
DZ-MV550A m550a.dat

6 - 1
 Adjustment > Creating Reference Data

6-1-1 List of Jigs and Tools used when Creating Reference Data
NEW Skylark connection jig
Adjustment floppy disk Parts No. TP14161
Note:Create the data using the adjustment data
downloaded from Intranet. If downloading
is not possible, obtain the floppy disk with
Parts No. TP13874
Personal computer (PC)
All of the following OS must operate normally on it.*1
OS: Windows 95/98/98 Second Edition/Me/2000 Professional/XP/NT4.0

C12 light balancing filter DSP-R jig

(Diameter: 46mm) Parts No. 7099448
Parts No. 7099369

Step-up rings (Diameter 37 - 46 mm)

[Generally available]
Note: The filter diameter of DVD video camera/recorder is 37 mm: When
using a filter with a diameter of 46 mm, use a step-up rings for better
workability.

RS-232C cable (9-pin or 25-pin straight type) AV/S input/output or output cable
[Generally available] [Accessory: Parts No. EW12521]

DZ-ACS1 Power cable for AC adapter/charger

AC adapter/charger [Accessory] *2 Example
[Accessory] *2

DC power cord *1: The adjustment program used on DVD video

[Accessory: Parts No. EV11012] camera/recorder is exclusively for Windows
95/98/98 Second Edition/Me/2000
Professional/XP/NT4.0: The program cannot
be run on MS-DOS.
*2: The part numbers of AC adapter/charger and
power cable are different depending on the
destination: Refer to the “Replacement Parts
List” for the part numbers.

6 - 2
 Adjustment > Creating Reference Data

6-1-2 Power Supply and Materials for Creating Reference Data

1) DVD video camera/recorder that is the same model as the one to be adjusted and whose camera
block is operating normally.

Note:
It is recommended that you use a brand-new unit of the same model when creating the reference
data. If such a unit is not available, use the same model of the DVD video camera/recorder that is
received from customer for repairing fault in disc drive that is other than in the camera block,
and one where there is no problem in recording of camera image and the zoom is operating
normally.

2) 3100 K light box (maintenance is necessary)

3) Color monitor (color TV with AV input jacks)
4) DC power supply for DSP-R jig (5 V/1 A)

6-1-3 Connections when Creating Reference Data

Connect the DVD video camera/recorder (for creating reference data), jigs and test equipment as
shown in Fig. 6-1-1.

Prohibition:
Assemble the DVD video camera/recorder completely, and create reference data with only the
adjustment cover removed (see Fig. 6-1-1).
Do not attempt to create reference data with the DVD video camera/recorder disassembled: Doing
so is very dangerous because the DVD video camera/recorder incorporates high-voltage circuits and
a laser emitter block.

(1) Setting of light box

1) Use a light box whose color temperature is controlled with no flickering: Using an inappropriate
light box will interference with work.

(2) Setting and disassembly of DVD video camera/recorder

1) Refer to “(1) Adjustment cover” in “5-3 Disassembly” for how to remove the adjustment cover.
2) Set the light box 30-50 cm away from DVD video camera/recorder, and eliminate any effects from
surrounding light, except where such designation is given.
3) Set the lens surface of DVD video camera/recorder in parallel with the surface of light box as far
as possible, and adjust the focus.
4) Use a small tripod to fix the DVD video camera/recorder, making certain it does not move during
creation of reference data.

6 - 3
Adjustment > Creating Reference Data

Note:
1) Always connect the Skylark connection jig before connecting the DC power cord to DZ-MV580A/
MV550A: Connecting the Skylark connection jig after powering the DZ-MV580A/MV550A could
cause a fault.
2) Connect the Skylark connection jig so that the lead wires from jig face up.

COLOR
LIGHT BOX MONITOR

30-50cm

FRONT
SECTION To YEL
VIDEO IN

REMOVE THE
ADJUSTMENT COVER
[Refer to "(1) Adjustment cover" AV/S INPUT/OUTPUT
in "5-3 Disassembly".] CABLE
DC Power
CORD
TRIPOD To AC OUTLET

SKYLARK
CONNECTION DC
POWER POWER CABLE
JIG
SUPPLY
(5V/1A)
DZ-ACS1
RED BLK

PC
GND
(PIN 16) BLK
YEL RS-232C
CABLE

DSP-R JIG
SD WHT
RD
(PIN 20) (PIN 18)

Fig. 6-1-1 Connections when Creating Reference Data

6 - 4
 Adjustment > Creating Reference Data

6-1-4 Settings when Creating Reference Data

When the connections for creating reference data are complete, set the DVD video camera/recorder
and test equipment as follows:
1) Make sure that no disc or card is inserted: Neither is necessary when creating reference data.
2) Set the power switch to “VIDEO” and quick mode switch to “OFF”: After that operate the DVD
video camera/recorder while watching the LCD monitor screen.
3) Press the MENU button to display the menu screen.
4) Use the joystick to choose “Initial Setup”, and then press the center of joystick.
5) Use the joystick to choose “Reset”, and then press the center of joystick: The screen for verifying
reset will appear.
6) Use the joystick to choose “ENTER”, and then press the center of joystick: Reset will be executed.
7) When reset is complete, operate the joystick by the above procedure to set the items on menu
screens as follows:
a) Specify Demo Mode “Off” in Initial Setup menu. Failing to specify Demo Mode “Off” will
interfere with adjustment.
8) Press the MENU button to restore the normal display.

Information:
The following table shows the menu status after the above settings:
The settings for Date Setup are not shown in the table below, since they do not have any meaning
when creating reference data.

Item Setting Item Setting

Camera Functions Setup LCD Setup
Program AE Auto Brightness +
White Balance Auto Color Level +
EIS On Initial Setup
Dig. Zoom ×40 Beep On
MIC Filter Off Power Save Off
16:9 (DZ-MV580A only) Off Record LED On
Recording Functions Setup Language English
VIDEO Mode FINE Demo Mode Off
Quality FINE
Input Source CAMERA
PHOTO Input Field
Self Timer Off
OSD Output Off

6 - 5
 Adjustment > Creating Reference Data

6-1-5 Copy or Deleting Adjustment Program

Information:
The adjustment program also includes a program for creating reference data.

(1) Copy
1) Start the PC.
2) Start Explorer and create a new folder in HDD of PC. The name “map04w” is recommended for
the folder: If a folder with the same name exists, give the folder a similar name that is easily
understandable.

Note:
Be sure to manage the adjustment programs for Windows and MS-DOS in different folders:
Managing them in the same folder will interfere with adjustment.

3) Copy all the folders and files on adjustment floppy disk to the map04w folder.

(2) Deleting
If it is necessary to delete the adjustment program from hard disk drive (HDD) of PC, delete the
map04w folder that was created during storage.

6-1-6 Starting and Terminating Reference Data Creation Program

Make sure that the connections are correct, the power switch on DVD video camera/recorder is set
to “VIDEO”, and the DC power supply for DSP-R jig is turned on: The reference data creation
program will not start unless the connections for creating reference data are correct, and the DVD
video camera/recorder or DSP-R jig is powered.
For subsequent operation, operate the PC mouse while watching the PC monitor screen.

Information:
1) Display ×××× on subsequent PC screen shows the model name.
2) The numbers on PC screens show the operational procedure.

(1) Start
1) Start the PC. If the PC has already started, terminate all other applications.
2) Start Explorer, and double-click the “SETUPforMAP2004W.EXE” file in map04w folder to start
the program.
3) Once the program has started, the COMMUNICATION PORT SETTING screen will appear.

6 - 6
Adjustment > Creating Reference Data

4) Choose the communication port to which the RS-232C COMMUNICATION PORT SETTING
screen
cable is connected, and then choose the radio button of MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

corresponding port on COMMUNICATION PORT

SETTING screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM
5) Click the OK button on the COMMUNICATION PORT for SERVICE STATION

SETTING screen, and then proceed with the MODEL

SELECT screen.
COM PORT SETTING
PORT
Note: PORT 1 PORT 4
4 PORT 2 PORT 5
If the following dialogs appear, perform the PORT 3 PORT 6
troubleshooting below:
5 OK EXIT
POWER OR CONNECTION ERROR dialog
ERROR

MAY OCCURE ON CABLE OR JIG OR CAMCORDER.

! POWER FAILURE OR CONNECTION ERROR! Copyright (C) HITACHI, Ltd 2003

OK

COM PORT ERROR dialog

ERROR

! COM PORT ERROR

OK

When the power or connection error dialog appears:

A connection is incorrect or power is not turned on.
Make sure that all connections are correct and that
power is supplied to the reference data creating
device or DSP-R interface jig.
Clicking the OK button will finish the program:
After solving the problem, restart the program.

When the communication port error dialog appears:

There was a mistake in selecting communication port.
Check the communication port.
Clicking the OK button will finish the program:
Select the communication port again after restart.

6 - 7
 Adjustment > Creating Reference Data

6) Choose the radio button of corresponding model name in MODEL SELECT screen.
MODEL SELECT screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

7) Click the ENTER button in MODEL SELECT screen, MODEL SELECT

and then proceed with the SETUP MENU screen.

××××
Refer to next item for subsequent operations.
If there is an error in model selection, the FILE
××××
HANDLE ERROR dialog will appear. Click the OK
button, and then choose the correct model.
××××

Note:
××××
If the FILE HANDLE ERROR dialog appears when the
correct model has been chosen, obtain (download) the
newest adjustment program, and then start over again. 7 ENTER EXIT
6
If the FILE HANDLE ERROR dialog still appears with CONNECTION
the newest adjustment program, check with the factory.
SETUP MENU screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

(2) Termination SETUP MENU

1) Click the RETURN button on MENU screen of
Matrix
program to return to the MODEL SELECT screen.
White Balance
2) Click the EXIT button on the MODEL SELECT screen.
White Balance Abs

Information:
If the PC does not accept any operation during work, EXECUTE RETURN

or the reference data creating program does not work,

perform the following procedure:
FILE HANDLE ERROR dialog
1) Set the power switch of reference data creating ERROR

device to “OFF”. ! File hundle error. [SYMBOL FILE]

2) Turn off the DC power supply of DSP-R interface jig. OK

3) Simultaneously press the Ctrl, Alt and Delete keys

on PC keyboard to restart the PC.
4) After the PC restarts, set the power switch of
reference data creating device to “VIDEO” and turn
on the DC power supply of DSP-R interface jig again.
5) Restart the reference data creating program.

6 - 8
 Adjustment > Creating Reference Data

6-1-7 Creating Reference Data

Start the setup program referring to “6-1-6 Starting and Terminating Reference Data Creation
Program”. For subsequent operation, operate the PC mouse while watching the PC monitor screen.

Information: SETUP MENU screen.

It takes approx. 20 minutes to create reference data. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

The following shows the times required for each item:

Matrix: Approx. 10 minutes SETUP MENU

White Balance: Approx. 10 minutes Matrix 1

White Balance Abs: Approx. 30 seconds White Balance

White Balance Abs

Preparation:
1) Point at light box without chart, filling the screen. 2 EXECUTE RETURN

2) Prepare the C12 light balancing filter (step-up rings):

Attach it during setup. ATTACH THE FILTER dialog
Procedure: CHECK

1) Choose MATRIX on the SETUP MENU screen. ! Attach The Filter.

2) Click the EXECUTE button on SETUP MENU screen to OK 3

start setup.
REMOVE THE FILTER dialog
3) The ATTACH THE FILTER dialog will appear during
CHECK
setup. Attach the C12 light balancing filter over the lens
! Remove The Filter.

of DVD video camera/recorder, and then click the OK OK 4

button in ATTACH THE FILTER dialog.
4) The REMOVE THE FILTER dialog will appear during SETUP FINISHED dialog
setup. FINISHED
SETUP FINISHED.
Remove the C12 light balancing filter from the lens of
OK 5
DVD video camera/recorder, and then click the OK
button in REMOVE THE FILTER dialog. SETUP MENU screen.
After that, the ATTACH THE FILTER dialog and MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

REMOVE THE FILTER dialog may occasionally appear:

Reattach the C12 light balancing filter and remove it SETUP MENU

each time. Matrix

5) When setup is complete, the SETUP FINISHED dialog White Balance 6

will appear: Click the OK button in White Balance Abs

dialog to restore the SETUP MENU screen.

When setup is complete with the C12 light balancing 7 EXECUTE RETURN

filter attached, remove the C12 light balancing filter.

6) Choose WHITE BALANCE on the SETUP MENU
screen.
7) Repeat steps 2)-5).

6 - 9
 Adjustment > Creating Reference Data

8) Choose WHITE BALANCE ABS on the SETUP MENU SETUP MENU screen.
screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

9) Repeat steps 2)-5). SETUP MENU

10) Click the RETURN button on SETUP MENU screen.

Matrix
11) The ALL SETUP FINISH dialog will appear: Click the
White Balance
OK button to complete the creation of reference data.
White Balance Abs 8

Note:
10
Neither Matrix, White Balance nor White Balance Abs in 9 EXECUTE RETURN

SETUP MENU can be executed independently. Be sure to

execute all items at the same time. ALL SETUP FINISH dialog
If you click the RETURN button on the SETUP MENU FINISHED
ALL SETUP FINISHED.
screen with an unfinished item, the EXECUTE OTHER OK 11
ITEMS dialog will appear. Click the OK button in
EXECUTE OTHER ITEMS dialog, and then execute the
unfinished items.

EXECUTE OTHER ITEMS dialog

CONTINUE
EXECUTE OTHER ITEMS.

OK

6 - 10
Adjustment > Setups for Adjustment

6-2 Setups for Adjustment

6-2-1 Checking Reference Data
Before starting adjustment, check whether it will be necessary to create the reference data or not,
referring to the flowchart below:

Have you ever performed No

adjustment of this model?

Yes

Does the “map04w” folder

Will you use the No exist on HDD of PC with No
same PC as for past Create the reference data
which you previously referring to section 6-1.
adjustment? performed adjustment?

Yes Yes

Copy the “map04w” folder

from the PC with which you
performed adjustment.

Will you use the same No

light box as for past
adjustment?

Yes

Did you perform Yes

maintenance on the light
box after the last
adjustment?

No

Will you use the same

C12 light balancing No Create the reference data
filteras for past referring to section 6-1.
adjustment?

Yes

It is not necessary to create

the reference data.

Fig. 6-2-1

6-2-2 List of Jigs and Tools for Adjustment

This list is the same as when creating reference data: Refer to “6-1-1 List of Jigs and Tools when
Creating Reference Data”.

6 - 11
Adjustment > Setups for Adjustment

6-2-3 Test Equipment, Power Supply and Charts for Adjustment

1) Color bar chart
2) 3100 K light box (maintenance is necessary)
3) Backfocus chart
4) Color monitor (color TV with AV input jacks)
5) Oscilloscope
6) Vectorscope
7) Digital voltmeter Fig. 6-2-2 Color Bar Chart
8) Frequency counter
9) DC power supply for DSP-R jig (5 V/1 A)

Information:
It is recommended that you use a vectorscope when
performing the chroma gain adjustment.
You can use an oscilloscope instead: Note, however, that
the adjustment accuracy will be lower.

Fig. 6-2-3 Backfocus Chart

6-2-4 Connections for Adjustment

Connect the DVD video camera/recorder, jigs and test equipment as shown in the Fig. 6-2-4.

Prohibition:
Assemble the DVD video camera/recorder completely, and perform adjustment with only the
adjustment cover removed (see Fig. 6-2-4).
Do not attempt to perform any adjustment with the DVD video camera/recorder disassembled:
Doing so is very dangerous because the DVD video camera/recorder incorporates high-voltage
circuits and a laser emitter block.

(1) Setting of light box

1) Use the same light box as when the reference data was created: Its color temperature and
illuminance are strictly controlled and free from flickering. If the setting of color box is not
appropriate, the adjustment program may not operate normally.

(2) Setting and disassembly of DVD video camera/recorder

1) Refer to “(1) Adjustment cover” in “5-3 Disassembly” for how to remove the adjustment cover.
2) Set the light box 30-50 cm away from DVD video camera/recorder, and eliminate any effects
from surrounding light, except where such designation is given.
3) Set the lens surface of DVD video camera/recorder in parallel with the surface of light box as far
as possible, and adjust the focus.
4) Use a small tripod to fix the DVD video camera/recorder, making certain it does not move during
creation of reference data.
5) Be sure to connect the video output of DVD video camera/recorder to the video input jack of color
monitor, which is usually terminated by 75 ohm: If the video output is not terminated by 75
ohm, the video output value cannot be measured correctly.
6 - 12
 Adjustment > Setups for Adjustment

Note:
1) Always connect the Skylark connection jig before connecting the DC power cord to DZ-MV580A/
MV550A: Connecting the Skylark connection jig after powering the DZ-MV580A/MV550A could
cause a fault.
2) Connect the Skylark connection jig so that the lead wires from jig face up.

OSCILLOSCOPE
COLOR
MONITOR Nothing VECTOR
SCOPE
LIGHT BOX CH1 CH2
TEL

30-50cm To
VIDEO IN
VECTOR SCOPE
FRONT
SECTION To OUTPUT

REMOVE THE To INPUT YEL

ADJUSTMENT COVER
[Refer to "(1) Adjustment cover" AV/S INPUT/OUTPUT
in "5-3 Disassembly".] CABLE
DC POWER
CORD
TRIPOD To AC OUTLET

DC POWER CABLE
FREQUENCY SKYLARK POWER
COUNTER CONNECTION SUPPLY
JIG (5V/1A)
DZ-ACS1
RED
BLK

LCD-HDD GND PC
(PIN 9) (PIN 16) BLK
YEL RS-232C
CABLE

DSP-R JIG
SD RD WHT
(PIN 20) (PIN 18)

Fig. 6-2-4 Connections for Adjustment

6 - 13
Adjustment > Setups for Adjustment

6-2-5 Settings for Adjustment

When the connections for adjustment are complete, set the DVD video camera/recorder and test
equipment as follows:

(1) Setting the DVD video camera/recorder

Information:
This item is the same as when creating reference data.

1) Make sure that no disc or card is inserted: Neither is necessary when creating reference data.
2) Set the power switch to “VIDEO” and quick mode switch to “OFF”: After that operate the DVD
video camera/recorder while watching the LCD monitor screen.
3) Press the MENU button to display the menu screen.
4) Use the joystick to choose “Initial Setup”, and then press the center of joystick.
5) Use the joystick to choose “Reset”, and then press the center of joystick: The screen for verifying
reset will appear.
6) Use the joystick to choose “ENTER”, and then press the center of joystick: Reset will be
executed.
7) When reset is complete, operate the joystick by the above procedure to set the items on menu
screens as follows:
a) Specify Demo Mode “Off” in Initial Setup menu. Failing to specify Demo Mode “Off” will
interfere with adjustment.
8) Press the MENU button to restore the normal display.

Information:
The following table shows the menu status after the above settings:
The settings for Date Setup are not shown in the table below, since they do not have any meaning
when creating reference data.

Item Setting Item Setting

Camera Functions Setup LCD Setup
Program AE Auto Brightness +
White Balance Auto Color Level +
EIS On Initial Setup
Dig. Zoom ×40 Beep On
MIC Filter Off Power Save Off
16:9 (DZ-MV580A only) Off Record LED On
Recording Functions Setup Language English
VIDEO Mode FINE Demo Mode Off
Quality FINE
Input Source CAMERA
PHOTO Input Field
Self Timer Off
OSD Output Off

6 - 14
Adjustment > Setups for Adjustment

(2) Setting test equipment

The names of switches, etc. of test equipment may vary depending on the manufacturer and model.
Some switches in addition to those shown below may have to be set: See the instruction manual of
test equipment for details.
1) Oscilloscope
a) Probe: 10:1
b) TIME/DIV: 10 or 20 µs (except where some other designation is given)
c) VOLTS/DIV: Change depending on the measurement object
d) TRIGGER SOURCE: CH1 (except where some other designation is given)
e) AC/DC/GND: AC
2) Vectorscope
a) SATURATION: 75%

6 - 15
Adjustment > Setups for Adjustment

6-2-6 Starting and Terminating Adjustment Program

Make sure that the connections are correct, the power switch on DVD video camera/recorder is set to
“VIDEO”, and the DC power supply for DSP-R jig is turned on. The adjustment program will not
start unless the connections for adjustment are correct, and the DVD video camera/recorder or DSP-
R jig is powered.

Information:
1) Display ×××× on subsequent PC screen shows the model name.
2) The numbers on PC screens show the operational procedure.

(1) Start COMMUNICATION PORT SETTING

1) Start the PC. If the PC has already started, terminate screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
all other applications.
2) Start Explorer, and double-click the “MAP2004W.EXE”
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM
file in map04w folder to start the adjustment program. for SERVICE STATION
3) Once the adjustment program has started, the
COMMUNICATION PORT SETTING screen will
appear. COM PORT SETTING
PORT
4) Check the communication port to which the RS-232C PORT 1 PORT 4
4
cable is connected, and then choose the radio button of PORT 2 PORT 5
PORT 3 PORT 6
corresponding port on COMMUNICATION PORT
SETTING screen.
5 OK EXIT
5) Click the OK button on the COMMUNICATION PORT
SETTING screen, and then proceed with the MODEL
SELECT screen. Copyright (C) HITACHI, Ltd 2003

Note:
POWER OR CONNECTION ERROR
If the dialogs on right appear, perform the following dialog
troubleshooting: ERROR

MAY OCCURE ON CABLE OR JIG OR CAMCORDER.

! POWER FAILURE OR CONNECTION ERROR!

When the power or connection error dialog appears: OK

A connection is incorrect or power is not turned on.

Make sure that all connections are correct and that
COM PORT ERROR dialog
power is supplied to the reference data creating ERROR

device or DSP-R interface jig. ! COM PORT ERROR

Clicking the OK button will finish the program: OK

After solving the problem, restart the program.

When the communication port error dialog appears:

There was a mistake in selecting communication port.
Check the communication port.
Clicking the OK button will finish the program:
Select the communication port again after restart.

6 - 16
Adjustment > Setups for Adjustment

Information: MODEL SELECT screen.

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
When communications between the PC and DVD video
camera/recorder are normal during adjustment, the word MODEL SELECT

“CONNECTION” in status bar (bottom left) of each screen

××××
will flash.

××××
6) Choose the radio button of corresponding model name in
MODEL SELECT screen.
××××
7) Click the ENTER button in MODEL SELECT screen,
and then proceed with the ADJUST MENU screen.
××××
Start of the adjustment program is now complete. Refer
to “6-3 Adjustment Procedure” for subsequent
operations. 7 ENTER EXIT
6
If there is an error in model selection, the FILE CONNECTION
HANDLE ERROR dialog will appear. Click the OK
ADJUST MENU screen.
button, and then choose the correct model. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

MODEL NAME: ××××

ADJUST MENU
Note:
If the FILE HANDLE ERROR dialog appears when the DATA INITIALIZE
VIDEO LEVEL
correct model has been chosen, obtain (download) the BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
newest adjustment program, and then start over again. AUTO FUCUS
If the FILE HANDLE ERROR dialog still appears with the AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
newest adjustment program, check with the factory. CHROMA GAIN
SPOT NOISE
LCD
EVF

(2) Termination
1) Click the RETURN button on MENU screen of
EXECUTE RETURN
adjustment program to return to the MODEL SELECT
screen. CONNECTION

2) Click the EXIT button on the MODEL SELECT screen.

FILE HANDLE ERROR dialog
Information: ERROR

If the PC does not accept any operation during work, or ! File hundle error. [SYMBOL FILE]

the reference data creating program does not work, OK

perform the following procedure:

1) Set the power switch of reference data creating device
to “OFF”.
2) Turn off the DC power supply of DSP-R interface jig.
3) Simultaneously press the Ctrl, Alt and Delete keys on
PC keyboard to restart the PC.
4) After the PC restarts, set the power switch of reference
data creating device to “VIDEO” and turn on the DC
power supply of DSP-R interface jig again.
5) Restart the reference data creating program.

6 - 17
Adjustment > List of Adjustment Items

6-3 List of Adjustment Items

6-3-1 Adjustment Program Hierarchy Diagram

Communication Port Setting

Data Initialize

Model Select
FILE MENU

Initial Data Write

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

MODEL NAME: × ×××

ADJUST MENU Backup Data Write

DATA INITIALIZE
Initial Data Write
VIDEO LEVEL
BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE Original Data Backup
AUTO FUCUS
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
Refer to "4-9-2 EEPROM data
MATRIX backup and write".
CHROMA GAIN
EXECUTE RETURN
SPOT NOISE
LCD Backup Data Write
EVF CONNECTION

VIDEO LEVEL Original Data Backup

EXECUTE RETURN

CONNECTION
BURST LEVEL

SAMPLING PULSE

AUTO FOCUS

AUTO IRIS CONTROL

MATRIX

CHROMA GAIN

SPOT NOISE

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

LCD PLL
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU

PLL
LCD CONTRAST-1
CONTRAST

LCD BRIGHT
BRIGHT

WHITE BALANCE
LCD CONTRAST-2

EXECUTE RETURN

LCD WHITE BALANCE

CONNECTION

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

EVF BL Check
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU

PLL EVF PLL

CONTRAST

EVF CONTRAST
BRIGHT

WHITE BALANCE
EVF BRIGHT

EXECUTE RETURN

EVF WHTIE BALANCE

CONNECTION

Fig. 6-3-1

6 - 18
Adjustment > List of Adjustment Items

6-3-2 List of Adjustments Needed After Replacing Major Components

Major Components
MAN-H/MAN circuit board(*1) MAN-H/MAN circuit board(*1) EVF LCD
Item
(EEPROM backup data already (EEPROM data backup unit(*3) unit
written) disabled)(*2)
Initial Data Write
Video Level
Burst Level
Sampling Pulse
Autofocus
Auto Iris Control
Matrix
Chroma Gain
Spot Noise
LCD PLL
LCD Contrast-1(*4)
LCD Bright(*4)
LCD Contrast-2(*4)
LCD White Balance
EVF BL DET Check
EVF PLL
EVF Contrast
EVF Bright
EVF White Balance

*1: Be sure to perform “4-9-2 EEPROM data backup and write” before replacing the MAN-H/MAN circuit
board.
*2: “EEPROM data backup disabled” refers to when the backup of EEPROM data from the MAN-H/MAN
circuit board to be replaced could not be properly executed due to some fault, such as DZ-MV580A/
MV550A not being turned on, etc.
*3: When replacing the EVF unit, be sure to perform EVF backlight check between the replaced and new
EVF units.
*4: The following three items cannot be performed singly. Be sure to perform these adjustments as a set
with the three items, and in the order stated:
LCD contrast – 1
LCD bright
LCD contrast – 2

6 - 19
Adjustment > List of Adjustment Items

Major Components
Lens unit Lens unit IC1001 IC1301 IC3701 IC6103
Item
[For DZ- [For DZ- [For DZ- IC1302
MV580A] MV550A] MV580A]
Initial Data Write
Video Level
Burst Level
Sampling Pulse
Autofocus
Auto Iris Control
Matrix
Chroma Gain
Spot Noise
LCD PLL
LCD Contrast-1(*4)
LCD Bright(*4)
LCD Contrast-2(*4)
LCD White Balance
EVF BL DET Check
EVF PLL
EVF Contrast
EVF Bright
EVF White Balance
*4: The following three items cannot be performed singly. Be sure to perform these adjustments as a set with
the three items, and in the order stated:
LCD contrast – 1
LCD bright
LCD contrast – 2

6 - 20
Adjustment > List of Adjustment Items

6-3-3 Purpose of Adjustments and Incompleted Phenomenon

Item Purpose Incompleted Phenomenon
Initial Data Write To write initial data to EEPROM in ------------
which adjustment data has been stored
Video Level To set the video output level. The picture becomes dark or whitish.
Burst Level To set the burst level.
Sampling Pulse To measure the delay time in sampling Diagonal beats and horizontal noise occur.
IC, and optimize pulse timing.
Autofocus To set out-of-focus correction level Focus is lost during zooming.
during zoom. It takes time until a subject is brought into
focus, or correct focus is not obtained.
Auto Iris Control To set iris control data. The picture becomes too bright or dark.
Matrix To compensate for unevenness in the Color reproduction becomes defective.
chroma signal and input auto white
balance control data.
Chroma Gain To set color saturation for the Color of the picture is denser or lighter
reference color temperature. than that of the subject.
Spot Noise To correct spot noise. Spot noise occurs.
LCD PLL To synchronize LCD image. Synchronization of LCD image is distorted.
LCD Contrast-1 To set the bright level and contrast of Color reproduction becomes defective of the
LCD Bright the LCD monitor. LCD monitor.
LCD Contrast-2
LCD White Balance
EVF BL DET Check To check the characteristics of EVF ------------
backlight.
EVF PLL To synchronize EVF image Synchronization of EVF image is distorted.
EVF Contrast To set the bright level and contrast of Color reproduction becomes defective of the
EVF Bright the viewfinder. viewfinder.
EVF White Balance

6 - 21
 Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

6-4 Adjustment Procedure

Start the adjustment program referring to “6-2-6 Starting and Terminating Adjustment Program”.
For the subsequent operation, operate the PC mouse while watching the PC monitor screen.

Information:
1) Display ×××× on subsequent PC screen shows the model name.
2) The numbers on PC screens show the operational procedure.

6-4-1 Initial Data Write ADJUST MENU screen

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
Note:
MODEL NAME: ××××
1) Write the initial data only after the MAN-H/MAN circuit ADJUST MENU

board has been replaced when the backup of EEPROM DATA INITIALIZE 1
data could not be performed using the MAN-H/MAN VIDEO LEVEL
BURST LEVEL
circuit board before replacement. SAMPLING PULSE

Refer to “4-9-2 EEPROM data backup and write” for AUTO FUCUS
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
backup of EEPROM data. MATRIX

2) Writing the initial data will initialize all the adjustment

CHROMA GAIN
SPOT NOISE
data in EEPROM. After writing, be sure to perform all LCD
EVF
the appropriate adjustments.

Procedure: 2 EXECUTE RETURN

1) Choose DATA INITIALIZE on the ADJUST MENU

CONNECTION
screen.
DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen Data Initialize

to proceed with the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen.

FILE MENU
3) Choose Initial Data Write on the DATA INITIALIZE
MENU screen. Initial Data Write 3
4) Click the EXECUTE button on DATA INITIALIZE
MENU screen to start writing of initial data.
The progress status can be confirmed using the Backup Data Write

PROGRESS STATUS dialog.

5) When writing is complete, the INITIALIZATION
FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in Original Data Backup

6
dialog to restore the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen.
6) Click the RETURN button on DATA INITIALIZE
4 EXECUTE RETURN
MENU screen to restore the ADJUST MENU screen,
and then be sure to perform all the adjustment items. CONNECTION

PROGRESS STATUS dialog

DATA INITIALIZE

PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT

INITIALIZATION FINISHED dialog

FINISHED
FINISHED WRITING DATA

OK 5

6 - 22
 Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

ADJUST MENU screen

6-4-2 Video Level MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

Preparations: MODEL NAME: ××××

1) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to video out.

ADJUST MENU

DATA INITIALIZE
2) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH1” and VIDEO LEVEL 1
TRIGGER SOURCE to “CH1”. BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
Procedure: AUTO FUCUS

1) Choose VIDEO LEVEL on the ADJUST MENU screen. AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen CHROMA GAIN

to proceed with the VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

SPOT NOISE
LCD
screen. EVF

3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that level of waveform

is 1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p. Click the button at approx. 2-second
2 EXECUTE RETURN
intervals while checking any increase or decrease in
level of waveform. CONNECTION

4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT screen
button. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the

VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
ADJUST MENU screen to the status before the
adjustment was performed.
5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to
restore the ADJUST MENU screen. UP DOWN

4 SAVE RETURN

1.0V
± 0.05Vp-p
CONNECTION

ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog

FINISHED

Fig. 6-4-1 ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.

OK 5

6 - 23
 Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

ADJUST MENU screen

6-4-3 Burst Level MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

Preparations: MODEL NAME: ××××

1) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to video out.

ADJUST MENU

DATA INITIALIZE
2) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH1” and VIDEO LEVEL
TRIGGER SOURCE to “CH1”. BURST LEVEL 1
SAMPLING PULSE
Procedure: AUTO FUCUS

1) Choose BURST LEVEL on the ADJUST MENU screen. AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen CHROMA GAIN

to proceed with the BURST LEVEL ADJUSTMENT SPOT NOISE

LCD
screen. EVF

3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that burst level of the

waveform is 286mV ± 15 mVp-p. Click the button at
2 EXECUTE RETURN
approx. 2-second intervals while checking any increase
or decrease in burst level. CONNECTION

4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE BURST LEVEL ADJUSTMENT screen
button. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the

BURST LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
ADJUST MENU screen to the status before the
adjustment was performed.
5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to
restore the ADJUST MENU screen. UP DOWN

4 SAVE RETURN

286mV
± 15mVp-p
CONNECTION

ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog

Fig. 6-4-2 FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.

OK 5

6 - 24
 Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

ADJUST MENU screen

6-4-4 Sampling Pulse MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

Note: MODEL NAME: ××××

ADJUST MENU
Start this adjustment after the circuit operation is
DATA INITIALIZE
stabilized, e.g., after leaving the DVD video camera/ VIDEO LEVEL

recorder for at least one hour at normal temperature, and BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE 1
then starting within 90 seconds after turning it on. AUTO FUCUS

Unstable circuit operation will cause improper adjustment. AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
CHROMA GAIN
SPOT NOISE
Preparation: LCD
Cap the lens of DVD video camera/recorder. EVF

Procedure:
1) Choose SAMPLING PULSE on the ADJUST MENU
2 EXECUTE RETURN
screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen CONNECTION

to start adjustment. ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog

3) When adjustment is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED

FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in

ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.

OK 3
dialog to restore the ADJUST MENU screen.

6 - 25
 Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

ADJUST MENU screen

6-4-5 Autofocus MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

Preparations: MODEL NAME: ××××

1) Use the backfocus chart vertically (portrait mode) as ADJUST MENU

shown in Fig. 6-4-3.

DATA INITIALIZE
VIDEO LEVEL
2) Point at backfocus chart 1500mm ± 5 mm away from the BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
lens surface: Measure the distance precisely. AUTO FUCUS 1
3) Set the zoom to telephoto end, and make sure that the AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
center of backfocus chart appears. CHROMA GAIN

4) If an illuminometer is available and the brightness of SPOT NOISE

LCD
illumination can be varied, set the illuminance of EVF

backfocus chart surface to 200-400 lx. This setting is not

necessary if the brightness of illumination cannot be
2 EXECUTE RETURN
varied: Perform adjustment under indoor light that is as
bright as possible. CONNECTION

Procedure: ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog

1) Choose AUTO FOCUS on the adjustment menu screen. FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen OK 3
to start adjustment.
AF ADJUSTMENT ERROR dialog
3) When adjustment is complete, the ADJUSTMENT
ERROR
FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in Lens Adjustment Error

dialog to restore the ADJUST MENU screen. OK

If the AF ADJUSTMENT ERROR dialog appears, click

the OK button in dialog, perform the following
troubleshooting, and then execute readjustment:
a) Increase the illumination.
b) Set the distance between the backfocus chart and
lens surface precisely to 1500mm ± 5 mm.
If the AF adjustment error dialog still appears even after
troubleshooting, the connection of lens unit may be
incorrect or the unit may be faulty.

Fig. 6-4-3 Backfocus Chart

6 - 26
 Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

6-4-6 Auto Iris Control ADJUST MENU screen

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

Preparation: MODEL NAME: ××××

Set zoom to wide-angle end, and point at light box without ADJUST MENU

chart, filling the screen. DATA INITIALIZE

VIDEO LEVEL
Procedure: BURST LEVEL

1) Choose AUTO IRIS CONTROL on the ADJUST MENU SAMPLING PULSE

AUTO FUCUS
screen. AUTO IRIS CONTROL 1
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen
MATRIX
CHROMA GAIN
to start adjustment. SPOT NOISE
LCD
The progress status can be confirmed using the EVF

PROGRESS STATUS dialog.

3) When adjustment is complete, the ADJUSTMENT
FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in 2 EXECUTE RETURN

dialog to restore the ADJUST MENU screen. CONNECTION

If the IRIS ADJUSTMENT ERROR dialog appears, click PROGRESS STATUS dialog
the OK button in dialog, perform the appropriate AUTO IRIS CONTROL

corrective action, and then perform readjustment. If the

IRIS ADJUSTMENT ERROR dialog still appears after PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT

the corrective action, the lens unit may be faulty: ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
a) Turn the light box off, and then make sure that no FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.

surrounding light reflects on glass surface of light OK 3

box. If any surrounding light does reflect on it,
IRIS ADJUSTMENT ERROR dialog
perform adjustment in a place where no ERROR

surrounding light will affect the adjustment. Iris Adjustment Error

b) Widen or shorten the distance between the light box OK

and DVD video camera/recorder.

6 - 27
 Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

6-4-7 Matrix ADJUST MENU screen

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
Preparation: MODEL NAME: ××××
1) Point at light box without chart, filling the screen. ADJUST MENU

2) Prepare the C12 light balancing filter (set-up rings): DATA INITIALIZE
VIDEO LEVEL
Attach it during adjustment. BURST LEVEL

Procedure: SAMPLING PULSE

AUTO FUCUS
1) Choose MATRIX on the ADJUST MENU screen. AUTO IRIS CONTROL

2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen MATRIX 1

CHROMA GAIN
to start adjustment. SPOT NOISE

The progress status can be confirmed using the LCD

EVF
PROGRESS STATUS dialog.
3) The ATTACH THE FILTER dialog will appear during
setup. 2 EXECUTE RETURN

Attach the C12 light balancing filter over the lens of CONNECTION
DVD video camera/recorder, and then click the OK
PROGRESS STATUS dialog
button in ATTACH THE FILTER dialog. MATRIX

4) The REMOVE THE FILTER dialog will appear during

setup. PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT

Remove the C12 light balancing filter from the lens of

ATTACH THE FILTER dialog
DVD video camera/recorder, and then click the OK CHECK

button in REMOVE THE FILTER dialog. ! Attach The Filter.

After that, the ATTACH THE FILTER dialog and OK 3

REMOVE THE FILTER dialog may occasionally appear:
Reattach the C12 light balancing filter and remove it REMOVE THE FILTER dialog
CHECK
each time.
! Remove The Filter.
5) When adjustment is complete, the ADJUSTMENT
OK 4
FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in
dialog to restore the ADJUST MENU screen. ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.

OK 5

6 - 28
 Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

6-4-8 Chroma Gain

Preparation:
1) Point at light box without chart, filling the screen.
2) Prepare the color bar chart: Use it during adjustment.
Procedure:
1) Press the MENU button on DVD video camera/recorder, and use the joystick to specify “White
Bal.: Set” to display the white balance screen. (See Fig. 6-4-4)
2) Press the center button on joystick: The “ ” mark on the white balance setting screen will blink.
Hold down the button until the “ ” mark changes to a steady light.
3) Press the STOP button on DVD video camera/recorder.
4) Insert the color bar chart into light box and point the DVD video camera/recorder at the chart so
that it fills the screen.

Set EXIT

Fig. 6-4-4 White balance set screen

5) Choose CHROMA GAIN on the ADJUST MENU screen. ADJUST MENU screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

6) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen MODEL NAME: ××××

to proceed with the CHROMA GAIN ADJUSTMENT ADJUST MENU

screen. DATA INITIALIZE

VIDEO LEVEL
BURST LEVEL
SAMPLING PULSE
AUTO FUCUS
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
MATRIX
CHROMA GAIN 5
SPOT NOISE
LCD
EVF

6 EXECUTE RETURN

CONNECTION

6 - 29
 Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

7) Click the GAIN UP or GAIN DOWN button in ROUGH CHROMA GAIN ADJUSTMENT screen
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
ADJUSTMENT box so that the value of red vector or red
level approaches that in Table 6-4-1. Click the button at CHROMA GAIN ADJUSTMENT
approx. 2-second intervals while checking the increase or
decrease of vector or level. ROUGH ADJUSTMENT FINE ADJUSTMENT

8) Click the GAIN UP or GAIN DOWN button in FINE GAIN UP GAIN UP

ADJUSTMENT box so that the value of red vector or red

level matches that in Table 6-4-1. Click the button at
GAIN DOWN GAIN DOWN
approx. 2-second intervals while checking any increase
or decrease in vector or level.
9) After step 8) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE 7 8
button. 9 SAVE RETURN
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the
ADJUST MENU screen to the status before the CONNECTION
adjustment was performed.
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
10) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED FINISHED

dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.

restore the ADJUST MENU screen. OK 10

11) Press the MENU button on DVD video camera/recorder,

and use the joystick to specify (return to) “White Bal.:
Auto”.

Table 6-4-1 Value of Red Level/Vector

Model When using a vectorscope When using an oscilloscope
DZ-MV580A A = 310 % ± 5 % B = 850mV ± 20 mVp-p
DZ-MV550A A = 280 % ± 5 % B = 780mV ± 20 mVp-p

RED

BURST
A

RED

100%
Fig. 6-4-5 When using a vectorscope Fig. 6-4-6 When using an oscilloscope

6 - 30
 Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

6-4-9 Spot Noise

Information:
1) The SPOT NOISE adjustment compensates for bright points that appear on the screen, and these
are caused by a defect in pixel of CCD (image sensor) that may occur when DVD video camera/
recorder is used under particular conditions or for a long time. Therefore, execute SPOT NOISE
only in the following cases:
a) Pixel defect occurs in CCD and a bright point appears on screen,
b) Lens unit (CCD) is replaced
c) “Data Initialize” is executed
2) The presence or absence of a bright point that appears on screen due to pixel defect on CCD can
easily be judged by capping the lens. Use a CRT color monitor for this check.

Procedure: ADJUST MENU screen

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
1) Choose SPOT NOISE on the ADJUST MENU screen. MODEL NAME: ××××
2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen ADJUST MENU

to start adjustment. DATA INITIALIZE

VIDEO LEVEL
When SPOT NOISE starts, the DVD video camera/ BURST LEVEL
recorder will automatically turn on again. SAMPLING PULSE
AUTO FUCUS
3) When adjustment is complete, the ADJUSTMENT AUTO IRIS CONTROL

FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in MATRIX

CHROMA GAIN
dialog to restore the ADJUST MENU screen. SPOT NOISE 1
If bright point still appears after adjustment is finished, LCD
EVF
the lens unit (CCD) may be faulty.

2 EXECUTE RETURN

CONNECTION

ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog

FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.

OK 3

6 - 31
 Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

6-4-10 LCD
Note:
1) Perform LCD only after replacing the MAN-H/MAN circuit board, LCD circuit board or LCD unit,
or executing “Initial Data Write”.
2) Neither light box nor chart is needed for LCD adjustment.
Before performing any adjustments for LCD, be sure to shift the DVD video camera/recorder to the
test mode using the procedure below, and then display the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU.

Procedure: ADJUST MENU screen

1) Choose LCD on the ADJUST MENU screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

MODEL NAME: ××××

2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen ADJUST MENU

to shift the DVD video camera/recorder to the test mode. DATA INITIALIZE

The progress status can be confirmed using the VIDEO LEVEL

BURST LEVEL
PROGRESS STATUS dialog. SAMPLING PULSE

3) When the DVD video camera/recorder has shifted to the AUTO FUCUS
AUTO IRIS CONTROL
test mode, the LCD screen will be black and white (see MATRIX

Fig. 6-4-7), and the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen CHROMA GAIN
SPOT NOISE
will appear on the PC monitor screen. LCD 1
EVF

2 EXECUTE RETURN

CONNECTION

PROGRESS STATUS dialog

LCD ADJUSTMENT INITIALIZE

PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT

LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU

Fig. 6-4-7 LCD Monitor Screen LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU

PLL

CONTRAST

BRIGHT

WHITE BALANCE

EXECUTE RETURN

CONNECTION

6 - 32
Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

(1) LCD PLL LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

Preparation:
Connect the frequency counter to “LCD-HDD (pin 9)” of LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU

Skylark Connection jig. LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU

PLL 1
Procedure:
1) Choose PLL on the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen.
CONTRAST
2) Click the EXECUTE button on LCD ADJUSTMENT
MENU screen to proceed with the PLL ADJUSTMENT BRIGHT

screen.
Synchronization of the video on LCD monitor screen will WHITE BALANCE

be off at this time, and the image will flow.

3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that the frequency is 2 EXECUTE RETURN
15.734 kHz ± 0.1 kHz. Click the button at approx. 2-
second intervals while checking the variation of CONNECTION

frequencies.
PLL ADJUSTMENT screen.
4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

button.
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the PLL ADJUSTMENT

LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before

the adjustment was performed.
5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to UP DOWN

restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen.

3

4 SAVE RETURN

CONNECTION

ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog

FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.

OK 5

6 - 33
 Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

(2) LCD Contrast-1 LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
Note:
Be sure to adjust LCD brightness and LCD contrast-2 LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU

after completing LCD contrast-1 adjustment. LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU

PLL

Preparations:
CONTRAST 1
1) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “LCD-G (pin 5)” of
Skylark Connection jig. BRIGHT
2) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH2”: Leave the
TRRIGER SOURCE in “CH1” as is. WHITE BALANCE

Procedure
1) Choose CONTRAST on the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
2 EXECUTE RETURN
screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on LCD ADJUSTMENT CONNECTION

MENU screen to proceed with the CONTRAST

CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT screen
ADJUSTMENT screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that the value of level

A of waveform is 2.20V ± 0.02Vp-p. Click the button at CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT

approx. 2-second intervals while checking any increase

or decrease in level A.
4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE
button. UP DOWN

Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the

LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before 3
the adjustment was performed.
5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
4 SAVE RETURN
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to
restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen.
CONNECTION

ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog

FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.

OK 5
A

Fig. 6-4-8 Waveform of LCD Contrast-1 Adjustment

6 - 34
Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

(3) LCD Brightness LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
Note:
1) Be sure to adjust LCD contrast-1 before performing LCD LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU

brightness adjustment. LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU

2) Be sure to adjust LCD contrast-2 after completing LCD PLL

brightness adjustment.
CONTRAST

Preparations: BRIGHT 1
1) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “LCD-G (pin 5)” of
Skylark Connection jig. WHITE BALANCE

2) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH2”: Leave the

TRRIGER SOURCE in “CH1” as is.
2 EXECUTE RETURN
Procedure:
1) Choose BRIGHT on the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU CONNECTION

screen.
BRIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen
2) Click the EXECUTE button on LCD ADJUSTMENT MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

MENU screen to proceed with the BRIGHT

ADJUSTMENT screen. BLIGHT ADJUSTMENT

3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that the value of level

B of waveform is 2.35V ± 0.1Vp-p. Click the button at
approx. 2-second intervals while checking any increase
or decrease in level B. UP DOWN

4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE

button. 3
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before
4 SAVE RETURN
the adjustment was performed.
5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to CONNECTION

restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen. ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog

FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.

OK 5
B

Fig. 6-4-9 Waveform of LCD Bright Adjustment

6 - 35
 Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

(4) LCD Contrast-2 LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
Caution:
Be sure to adjust LCD contrast-1 and LCD brightness LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU

before performing LCD contrast-2 adjustment. LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU

PLL

Preparations:
CONTRAST 1
1) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “LCD-G (pin 5)” of
Skylark Connection jig. BRIGHT
2) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH2”: Leave the
TRRIGER SOURCE in “CH1” as is. WHITE BALANCE

Procedure
1) Choose CONTRAST on the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU
2 EXECUTE RETURN
screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on LCD ADJUSTMENT CONNECTION

MENU screen to proceed with the CONTRAST

CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT screen
ADJUSTMENT screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that the value of level

A of waveform is 2.00V ± 0.02Vp-p. Click the button at CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT

approx. 2-second intervals while checking any increase

or decrease in level A.
4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE
button. UP DOWN

Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the

LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before 3
the adjustment was performed.
5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
4 SAVE RETURN
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to
restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen.
CONNECTION

ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog

FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.

OK 5

Fig. 6-4-10 Waveform of LCD Contrast-2 Adjustment

6 - 36
Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

(5) LCD White Balance LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

Preparations:
1) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to “LCD-R (pin 3)” of
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU

Skylark Connection jig.

LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU

2) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “LCD-G (pin 5)” of PLL

Skylark Connection jig.

CONTRAST
3) Connect the oscilloscope EXT TRIG to video output.
4) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “ALT” and BRIGHT

TRIGGER SOURCE to “EXT”.

5) Set the switches and knobs on oscilloscope so that the WHITE BALANCE 1

CH1 and CH2 waveforms appear as shown in Fig. 6-4-

11. 2 EXECUTE RETURN

Procedure
1) Choose WHITE BALANCE on the LCD ADJUSTMENT CONNECTION

MENU screen. SUB CONTRAST RED ADJUSTMENT

2) Click the EXECUTE button on LCD ADJUSTMENT screen.
MENU screen to proceed with the SUB CONTRAST
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

RED ADJUSTMENT screen.

SUB CONTRAST RED ADJUSTMENT
3) Click the UP and DOWN buttons so that level a of CH1
waveform is equal to level b of CH2 waveform. Click the
button at approx. 2-second intervals while checking any
increase or decrease in level a.
UP DOWN
4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the NEXT
button, and then proceed with the SUB BRIGHT RED
3
ADJUSTMENT screen.
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the
LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before 4 NEXT RETURN

the adjustment was performed.

5) Use the same procedure as in step 3) to equalize levels c
CONNECTION
and d of the waveform.
SUB BRIGHT RED ADJUSTMENT screen.
6) After step 5) is complete, be sure to click the NEXT MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

button, and then proceed with the SUB CONTRAST

BLUE ADJUSTMENT screen. SUB BRIGHT RED ADJUSTMENT

CH1 c
UP DOWN
a

6 NEXT RETURN

CH2 d
b
CONNECTION

Fig. 6-4-11 Waveform of LCD White Balance Adjustment

6 - 37
 Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

7) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to “LCD-B (pin 7)” of SUB CONTRAST BLUE ADJUSTMENT
screen.
Skylark Connection jig. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

8) Use the same procedure as in step 3) to equalize levels a

and b of the waveform. (See Fig. 6-4-11) SUB CONTRAST BLUE ADJUSTMENT

9) After step 8) is complete, be sure to click the NEXT

button, and then proceed with the SUB BRIGHT BLUE
ADJUSTMENT screen.
10) Use the same procedure as in step 3) to equalize levels c UP DOWN
and d of the waveform.
11) After step 10) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE 8
button.
12) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
9 SAVE RETURN
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to
restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen.
13) Click the RETURN button in LCD ADJUSTMENT CONNECTION

MENU to restore the ADJUST MENU screen. SUB BRIGHT BLUE ADJUSTMENT
screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

SUB BRIGHT BLUE ADJUSTMENT

UP DOWN

10

11 NEXT RETURN

CONNECTION

ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog

FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.

OK 12

6 - 38
 Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

6-4-11 EVF
Note:
1) Perform EVF only after replacing IC3701 and its peripheral components, MAN-H/MAN circuit
board or EVF unit, or executing “Initial Data Write”.
2) Neither light box nor chart is needed for EVF adjustment.
Before performing any adjustments for EVF, be sure to shift the DVD video camera/recorder to the
test mode using the procedure below, and then display the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU.

Procedure: ADJUST MENU screen

1) Choose EVF on the ADJUST MENU screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

MODEL NAME: ××××

2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen ADJUST MENU

to shift the DVD video camera/recorder to the test mode. DATA INITIALIZE

The progress status can be confirmed using the VIDEO LEVEL

BURST LEVEL
PROGRESS STATUS dialog. SAMPLING PULSE
AUTO FUCUS
3) When the DVD video camera/recorder has shifted to the AUTO IRIS CONTROL
test mode, the viewfinder screen will be black and white MATRIX
CHROMA GAIN
(see Fig. 6-4-12), and the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU SPOT NOISE

will appear on the PC monitor screen. LCD

EVF 1

2 EXECUTE RETURN

CONNECTION

PROGRESS STATUS dialog

EVF ADJUSTMENT INITIALIZE

PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT

EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen

Fig. 6-4-12 EVF Screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU

EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU

PLL

CONTRAST

BRIGHT

WHITE BALANCE

EXECUTE RETURN

CONNECTION

6 - 39
Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

(1) EVF BL DET Check

Note:
Be sure to take note of the resulting value of this check because the check value will be needed
when EVF adjustment is completed.
There are two types of EVF unit mounted in these DZ-MV580A/MV550A:
The backlight characteristics of the two types are different.
This check item identifies the type of EVF unit mounted (replaced).
Procedure:
1) Connect the digital voltmeter to “BL-DET (pin 12)” of Skylark Connection jig.
2) Check whether the reading on digital voltmeter is 5 V or 0 V., and take note of the value.

(2) EVF PLL EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
Preparations:
1) Connect oscilloscope CH-1 to EVF-RPD (pin 8) of the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU

Skylark connection jig. EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU

2) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH1” and PLL 1

TRIGGER SOURCE to “CH1”
CONTRAST
Procedure:
1) Choose “PLL” on the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
BRIGHT
screen.
2) Click the EXECUTE button on EVF ADJUSTMENT WHITE BALANCE

MENU screen to proceed with the PLL ADJUSTMENT

screen.
2 EXECUTE RETURN
3) Click the UP or DOWN button to flatten the waveform:
Click the button at intervals of approx. 2 seconds while
CONNECTION
observing the movement of waveform.
PLL ADJUSTMENT screen
4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

button.
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the PLL ADJUSTMENT
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before
the adjustment was performed.
5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to UP DOWN
restore the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen.

4 SAVE RETURN

CONNECTION

ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog

FINISHED
Fig. 6-4-13 Waveform of EVF PLL Adjustment ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.

OK 5

6 - 40
 Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

(3) EVF Contrast

EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen
Preparations: MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

1) Confirm the CH1 connection to video out.

EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
2) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “EVF-G (pin 4)” of EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
Skylark Connection jig.
PLL
3) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH2”: Leave the
TRIGGER SOURCE in “CH1” as is. CONTRAST 1
Procedure:
1) Choose CONTRAST on the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU BRIGHT

screen.
WHITE BALANCE
2) Click the EXECUTE button on EVF ADJUSTMENT
MENU screen to proceed with the CONTRAST
ADJUSTMENT screen. 2 EXECUTE RETURN

3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that level A of the

waveform is 1.9V ± 0.1Vp-p. Click the button at approx. CONNECTION

2-second intervals while checking any increase or CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT screen

decrease in level A.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE

CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
button.
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before
the adjustment was performed.
UP DOWN
5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to
3
restore the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen.

4 SAVE RETURN

CONNECTION

A ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog

FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.

Fig. 6-4-14 Waveform of EVF Contrast Adjustment OK 5

6 - 41
Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

(4) EVF Brightness EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen

Preparations: MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

1) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to video output. EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU

2) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “EVF-G (pin 4)” of EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU

Skylark Connection jig. PLL

3) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH2” and

TRIGGER SOURCE to “CH1”. CONTRAST

Procedure:
1
1) Choose BRIGHT on the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU
BRIGHT

screen. WHITE BALANCE

2) Click the EXECUTE button on EVF ADJUSTMENT
MENU screen to proceed with the BRIGHT
2
ADJUSTMENT screen.
EXECUTE RETURN

3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that level B of the

CONNECTION
waveform is 3.1V ± 0.1Vp-p. Click the button at approx.
BRIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen
2-second intervals while checking any increase or MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

decrease in level B.
4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE BLIGHT ADJUSTMENT

button.
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before
the adjustment was performed. UP DOWN
5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED
dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to 3
restore the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen.

4 SAVE RETURN

CONNECTION
B
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog
FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.

OK 5
Fig. 6-4-15 Waveform of EVF Bright Adjustment

6 - 42
Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

(5) EVF White Balance EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
Preparations:
1) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to “EVF-R (pin 2)” of EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU

Skylark Connection jig. EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU

2) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “EVF-G (pin 4)” of PLL

Skylark Connection jig.

CONTRAST
3) Connect the oscilloscope EXT TRIG to video output.
4) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “ALT” and BRIGHT
TRIGGER SOURCE to “EXT”.
5) Set the switches and knobs on oscilloscope so that the WHITE BALANCE 1

CH1 and CH2 waveforms appear as shown in Fig. 6-4-

16. 2 EXECUTE RETURN
Procedure:
1) Choose WHITE BALANCE on the EVF ADJUSTMENT CONNECTION

MENU screen.
SUB CONTRAST RED ADJUSTMENT
2) Click the EXECUTE button on EVF ADJUSTMENT screen.
MENU screen to proceed with the SUB CONTRAST MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

RED ADJUSTMENT screen.

SUB CONTRAST RED ADJUSTMENT
3) Click the UP and DOWN buttons so that level a of CH1
waveform is equal to level b of CH2 waveform. Click the
button at approx. 2-second intervals while checking
increase or decrease level a.
4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the NEXT UP DOWN

button, and then proceed with the SUB BRIGHT RED

ADJUSTMENT screen. 3

Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the

EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before 4 NEXT RETURN

the adjustment was performed.

5) Use the same procedure as in step 3) to equalize levels c
and d of the waveform.
CONNECTION

6) After step 5) is complete, be sure to click the NEXT SUB BRIGHT RED ADJUSTMENT screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
button, and then proceed with the SUB CONTRAST
BLUE ADJUSTMENT screen. SUB BRIGHT RED ADJUSTMENT

CH1 c
a UP DOWN

6 NEXT RETURN

CH2 d
b
CONNECTION

Fig. 6-4-16 Waveform of White Balance Adjustment

6 - 43
 Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure

7) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to “EVF-B (pin 6)” of SUB CONTRAST BLUE ADJUSTMENT
screen.
Skylark Connection jig. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

8) Use the same procedure as in step 3) to equalize levels a

and b of the waveform. SUB CONTRAST BLUE ADJUSTMENT

9) After step 8) is complete, be sure to click the NEXT

button, and then proceed with the SUB BRIGHT BLUE
ADJUSTMENT screen.
10) Use the same procedure as in step 3) to equalize levels c UP DOWN
and d of the waveform.
11) After step 10) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE 8
button and then proceed with the BL DET screen.
Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the
9 SAVE RETURN
EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before
the adjustment was performed.
12) Click either button on the BL DET screen according to CONNECTION

the voltage checked in “(1) EVF BL DET Check”: “High” SUB BRIGHT BLUE ADJUSTMENT
button when the check value is 5 V, or “Low” button screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION
when it is 0 V.
13) When BL DET is complete, the ADJUSTMENT SUB BRIGHT BLUE ADJUSTMENT
FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in
dialog to restore the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen.
14) Click the RETURN button in EVF ADJUSTMENT
MENU to restore the ADJUST MENU screen.
UP DOWN

10

11 NEXT RETURN

CONNECTION

BL DET screen.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION

BL DET

High Low

12

CONNECTION

ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog

FINISHED
ADJUSTMENT FINISHED.

OK 13

6 - 44
 7 Exploded View and Parts List
1 2 3 4
1F 2F 3F
Note: Components without any numbers4Fin exploded views had
7-1 Exploded Views not been assigned as service parts as of the date of issue F
F
7-1-1 L Block and Front Block of this manual.

904
1E 2E 3E 4E
143 123 905

E 909 E
905

DZ-MV550A106
904
906 119 149
904 b

1D 906 120 2D 3D 906

4D 124
905
904
DZ-MV580A 106
149
D Refer to "DZ-MV550A b D
Camera Block" 904
904
906 105

118
905
1C 2C 3C 4C
905
904 904 911 011
912 DISC DRIVE UNIT
DZ-MV550A
Refer to [Unit Replacement]
C DZ-MV580A "DZ-MV580A 912 C
Camera Block"

911

904 DRF-H/DRF
911 CIRCUIT BOARD
904 901
1B 2B 3B 4B [Component
SHE-H Replacement]
CIRCUIT SHE
BOARD CIRCUIT
117 [Component BOARD
Replacement] [Component
B Replacement] 102 B
901
906 b DZ-MV580A DZ-MV550A 901
121
AEL-H/AEL
CIRCUIT BOARD
116 [Component
Replacement]
103 101
1A 2A 3A 4A
144
901
904
009
MAN-H/MAN
901 Circuit Board
A [Assembly
107 Replacement] A
USB-H/USB
CIRCUIT BOARD
[Component
Replacement]

1 2 3 4
7-1
 1 2 3 4
1F 2F 3F 4F
7-1-2 R Block

F F

111 909

108 110

a
1E 2E 3E 4EFRT-H/FRT
CIRCUIT
909 BOARD
[Component
145 Replacement]

E 905
E
112
109 907
905 SWL3-H/SWL3
CIRCUIT BOARD
[Component Replacement]
910
909 SWL2
1D 2D 3D CIRCUIT 4D
909 BOARD
910 [Component 125
113 Replacement] Refer to
909 "LCD Unit"
D 126 905 D

909
909
909
127
909 907
1C 2C 3C 4C
910 114
910

C 128 C
a
122

904
914
904 149
1B 2B 3B 4B

904 905

B B

905
SAF-H/SAF
CIRCUIT BOARD
[Component Replacement]
1A 2A 3A 4A
Refer to
"R Block"

A A

1 2 3 4
7-2
 1 2 3 4
1F 2F 3F 4F
7-1-3 LCD Unit

F F

LCD
CIRCUIT
BOARD
[Component
139 Replacement]
1E 2E 3E 4E
133
917

MR CIRCUIT
BOARD
E [Component E
Replacement]
132
142

141
915 917 135
125
1D 2D 3D 4D

D D
7-1-4 DZ-MV580A Camera Block

602 913
SEN-H CIRCUIT BOARD
[Component Replacement]
1C 2C 601 3C 4C
913
603
604

C C
909
909
909

1B 2B 3B BOARD
GYR-H CIRCUIT 4B
[Component Replacement]
140

7-1-5 DZ-MV550A Camera Block

B B
909

140
GYR CIRCUIT BOARD
1A 2A 3A
[Component Replacement] 4A

A 909 A

909
601

1 2 3 4
7-3
7-2 Replacement Parts List
7-2-1 Mechanical Parts List
SYMBOL P-NO DESCRIPTION SYMBOL P-NO DESCRIPTION
NO NO
604 DT10561 CRYSTAL
MECHANISM SECTION 901 MK12071 SCREW(M1.7X3S)
904 MK13282 SCREW(1.6X2.5)
009 JP40015 PWB ASSY MAN 905 MK13283 SCREW(1.7X4)
009 JP40035 PWB ASSY MAN-H 906 MK13281 SCREW(1.6X2)

011 UA12512 DVD DRIVE ASSY(PC3RA) 907 MK13491 SCREW(1.7X4)

101 MC10581 HEAT SINK 909 MJ10281 SCREW(1.7X4)
102 MC10505 HEAT SINK 910 MK11992 SCREW(1.7X4)
103 MC10591 HEAT SINK 911 MK13251 SCREW(M1.7W)
105 HP13551 EVF ASSY 912 MK12821 SCREW(M1.7)

106 EZ10841 TERMINAL,SHOE [MV580A] 913 MK11911 SCREW(1.7X5)

106 QD28324 SHOE ASSY [MV550A] 914 7773852 SCREW(2X5)
107 NJ13052 HOLDER,USB 915 MK13286 SCREW(1.6X3)
108 QD28056 CASE,FRONT [MV580A] 917 MK13285 SCREW(1.7X4)
108 QD28055 CASE,FRONT [MV550A]

109 QX16743 COVER,MIC [MV580A] ACCESSORIES

109 QX16741 COVER,MIC [MV550A]
110 GH10421 MICROPHONE TS18066 ADPTOR,AC
111 QX16891 COVER,LENS [MV580A] EV11003 CORD,ACINLET
111 QX16881 COVER,LENS [MV550A] EW12521 CORD,AVS

112 QX16781 HOOD ASSY [MV580A] EV11012 CORD,DC

112 QX16751 HOOD ASSY [MV550A] HL11396 REMOTE HAND SET(DZ-RM3WF)
113 QX16816 COVER,JACK [MV580A] EW12531 CORD,USB
113 QX16812 COVER,JACK [MV550A] TS16752 STRAP,SHOLDER
114 QX17194 COVER,ADJUSTMENT [MV580A] QX16991 CAP,LENS

114 QX17195 COVER,ADJUSTMENT [MV550A] DN11541 CD-ROM(SWIFT)

116 NA33681 FRAME,MECHA
117 NX25351 LOCK UNIT
118 KX34312 LOADER ASSY
119 QD28251 CASE,SIDE(R) [MV580A]

119 QD28253 CASE,SIDE(R) [MV550A]

120 KX34141 BRACKET,LINK
121 MC10584 HEAT SINK
122 QD28024 COVER,DISC [MV580A]
122 QD28025 COVER,DISC [MV550A]

123 QD28232 COVER,REAR [MV580A]

123 QD28238 COVER,REAR [MV550A]
124 EZ10702 TERMINAL,BATTERY
125 HP13742 LCD UNIT [MV580A]
125 HP13744 LCD UNIT [MV550A]

126 QD27944 CASE,SIDE(L) [MV580A]

126 QD27947 CASE,SIDE(L) [MV550A]
127 QD28282 COVER(L) [MV580A]
127 QD27972 COVER(L) [MV550A]
128 NA33711 BRACKET(L)

132 NX24861 FULCRUM ASSY

133 QD28142 CASE,LCD(B)
135 QD28152 CASE,LCD(U) [MV580A]
135 QD28151 CASE,LCD(U) [MV550A]
139 MN19701 SHEET,LCD(MR)

140 NX25031 FRAME,LENS [MV580A]

140 NX25621 FRAME,LENS [MV550A]
141 PH24482 COVER,FULCRUM(U) [MV580A]
141 PH24481 COVER,FULCRUM(U) [MV550A]
142 PH24492 COVER,FULCRUM(B) [MV580A]

142 PH24491 COVER,FULCRUM(B) [MV550A]

143 PV10422 STRAP,HAND
144 MN20151 SHEET,LCD [MV580A]
144 MN20141 SHEET,LCD [MV550A]
145 NX25711 SCREW,FILTER

149 MN18084 SHEET,SPACE

601 KQ11162 LENS ASSY [MV580A]
601 HP13631 LENS ASSY [MV550A]
602 UE16641 SENSOR ASSY
603 MN19651 CUSHION

7-4
7-2-2 Electrical Parts List
SYMBOL P-NO DESCRIPTION SYMBOL P-NO DESCRIPTION
NO NO
C3409 0893179 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1UF+-10% 16V
CAMERA & VCR SECTION C3410 0893179 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1UF+-10% 16V
C3412 0893179 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1UF+-10% 16V
BL6201 BE10391R COIL C3413 AA00966R CHIP CAPACITOR 4.7UF+-20% 6.3V
BL6202 BE10391R COIL C3414 AA00933R CHIP CAPACITOR 1.5UF+-10% 10V

BL8101 BE10134R COIL 180UH C3415 0893179 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1UF+-10% 16V
C0153 0893222 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 50V C3417 0893193 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 25V
C1001 0893107 CERAMIC CHIP 5PF+-0.25% 50V C3418 AA01111R CERAMIC CHIP 1UF 6.3V
C1002 0893062 CERAMIC CHIP 1UF+80-20% 16V C3419 AA00968R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 10UF+-20% 6.3V
C1003 0893239 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+80-20% 50V C3420 0893179 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1UF+-10% 16V

C1004 AA00699R CHIP CAPACITOR 10UF+-20% 16V C3421 0893179 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1UF+-10% 16V
C1005 0893239 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+80-20% 50V C3441 0893126 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF+-5% 50V
C1006 AD10484R CAPACITOR 47UF+-20% 10V C3443 0893126 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF+-5% 50V
C1007 0893235 CERAMIC CHIP 2200PF+80-20% 50V C3701 AA00968R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 10UF+-20% 6.3V
C1008 0893239 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+80-20% 50V C3702 AA00968R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 10UF+-20% 6.3V

C1302 0893311 CERAMIC CHIP 220PF+-10% 50V C3703 AA00422R CERAMIC CHIP 10UF 16V
C1303 AA01111R CERAMIC CHIP 1UF 6.3V C3705 0893191 CERAMIC CHIP 6800PF+-10% 25V
C1309 0893315 CERAMIC CHIP 470PF+-10% 50V C3706 AA01121R CERAMIC CHIP 0.47UF+-10% 10V
C1310 0893333 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 16V C3707 AA01121R CERAMIC CHIP 0.47UF+-10% 10V
C1311 0893328 CHIP CAPACITOR 4700PF+-10% 25V C3708 AA01121R CERAMIC CHIP 0.47UF+-10% 10V

C1312 AA01111R CERAMIC CHIP 1UF 6.3V C3709 AA01121R CERAMIC CHIP 0.47UF+-10% 10V
C1314 0893276 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF+-5% 50V C3710 0893193 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 25V
C1315 AA01111R CERAMIC CHIP 1UF 6.3V C3711 AA10382R CHIP CAPACITOR 1UF+-10% 6.3V
C1316 0893316 CHIP CAPACITOR 560PF+-10% 50V [MV580A] C3712 AA10382R CHIP CAPACITOR 1UF+-10% 6.3V
C1316 AA10873R CHIP CAPACITOR 0.068UF+-10% 10V[MV550A] C3713 0893184 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022UF+-10% 16V

C1318 AA00951R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 1.0UF+-10% 16V C3715 AA01111R CERAMIC CHIP 1UF 6.3V
C1319 AD10484R CAPACITOR 47UF+-20% 10V C3716 AA01111R CERAMIC CHIP 1UF 6.3V
C1320 0893333 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 16V C3717 AA01111R CERAMIC CHIP 1UF 6.3V
C1321 AA01101R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 1UF 10V C3718 AA00951R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 1.0UF+-10% 16V
C1322 0893133 CERAMIC CHIP 330PF+-5% 50V C3720 AA01111R CERAMIC CHIP 1UF 6.3V

C1323 0893133 CERAMIC CHIP 330PF+-5% 50V C6101 AA10872R CHIP CAPACITOR 0.1UF+-10% 10V
C1324 0893333 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 16V [MV580A] C6102 0893354 CHIP CAPACITOR 0.015UF+-10% 16V
C1324 AA10885R CHIP CAPACITOR 0.22UF+-20% 6.3V [MV550A] C6103 0893358 CHIP CAPACITOR 0.033UF+-10% 16V
C1325 0893333 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 16V C6104 0893278 CERAMIC CHIP 150PF+-5% 50V
C1331 AA01111R CERAMIC CHIP 1UF 6.3V C6105 AA01132R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 0.22UF+-10% 6.3V

C1332 AA10872R CHIP CAPACITOR 0.1UF+-10% 10V C6106 0893354 CHIP CAPACITOR 0.015UF+-10% 16V
C1333 AA01113R CHIP CAPACITOR 2.2UF+-10% 6.3V C6107 AA10872R CHIP CAPACITOR 0.1UF+-10% 10V
C1334 AD10485R CHIP CAPACITOR 4.7UF+-20% 10V C6108 0893278 CERAMIC CHIP 150PF+-5% 50V
C1350 0893333 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 16V C6109 0893358 CHIP CAPACITOR 0.033UF+-10% 16V
C1351 AA10872R CHIP CAPACITOR 0.1UF+-10% 10V C6110 AA01132R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 0.22UF+-10% 6.3V

C1401 AA00966R CHIP CAPACITOR 4.7UF+-20% 6.3V C6111 0893331 CHIP CAPACITOR 6800PF+-10% 25V
C1402 AA00966R CHIP CAPACITOR 4.7UF+-20% 6.3V C6112 0893331 CHIP CAPACITOR 6800PF+-10% 25V
C1403 0893179 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1UF+-10% 16V C6113 AA00968R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 10UF+-20% 6.3V
C1404 0893179 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1UF+-10% 16V C6114 AA10885R CHIP CAPACITOR 0.22UF+-20% 6.3V
C1405 0893182 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015UF+-10% 16V C6115 0893333 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 16V

C1406 0893182 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015UF+-10% 16V C6116 AA10885R CHIP CAPACITOR 0.22UF+-20% 6.3V
C1407 0893182 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015UF+-10% 16V C6117 0893333 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 16V
C1408 0893182 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015UF+-10% 16V C6118 AA00968R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 10UF+-20% 6.3V
C1409 AA00966R CHIP CAPACITOR 4.7UF+-20% 6.3V C6131 AA00968R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 10UF+-20% 6.3V
C1410 AA00966R CHIP CAPACITOR 4.7UF+-20% 6.3V C6201 AA10382R CHIP CAPACITOR 1UF+-10% 6.3V

C1411 0893213 CERAMIC CHIP 2200PF+-10% 50V C6202 AA10382R CHIP CAPACITOR 1UF+-10% 6.3V
C1412 0893213 CERAMIC CHIP 2200PF+-10% 50V C6203 AA01132R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 0.22UF+-10% 6.3V
C1413 AA01101R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 1UF 10V C6204 AA01132R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 0.22UF+-10% 6.3V
C1801 AA00968R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 10UF+-20% 6.3V C6205 AA10382R CHIP CAPACITOR 1UF+-10% 6.3V
C1802 AA00966R CHIP CAPACITOR 4.7UF+-20% 6.3V C6206 AA10382R CHIP CAPACITOR 1UF+-10% 6.3V

C1803 AA01126R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 0.22UF+-10% 10V C6207 AA01113R CHIP CAPACITOR 2.2UF+-10% 6.3V
C1804 AA01126R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 0.22UF+-10% 10V C6208 AA00968R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 10UF+-20% 6.3V
C3401 0893193 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 25V C6301 AA00966R CHIP CAPACITOR 4.7UF+-20% 6.3V
C3402 0893193 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 25V C6302 AA01113R CHIP CAPACITOR 2.2UF+-10% 6.3V
C3403 0893193 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 25V C6303 AA01113R CHIP CAPACITOR 2.2UF+-10% 6.3V

C3404 AA00968R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 10UF+-20% 6.3V C6304 AA10872R CHIP CAPACITOR 0.1UF+-10% 10V
C3405 0893219 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0068UF+-10% 50V C6305 AA00968R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 10UF+-20% 6.3V
C3406 AA00935R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 3.3UF+-10% 10V C6306 AA01101R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 1UF 10V
C3407 0893179 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1UF+-10% 16V C6307 AA01101R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 1UF 10V
C3408 0893179 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1UF+-10% 16V C6308 AA01101R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 1UF 10V

7-5
SYMBOL P-NO DESCRIPTION SYMBOL P-NO DESCRIPTION
NO NO
C6309 AA10872R CHIP CAPACITOR 0.1UF+-10% 10V L6302 BA10577R COIL 10UH
C6310 0893333 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 16V L6303 BA10577R COIL 10UH
C6311 AD10484R CAPACITOR 47UF+-20% 10V L6304 BA10577R COIL 10UH
C6312 AA00968R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 10UF+-20% 6.3V L6305 BA10582R COIL 47UH
C6313 AA10382R CHIP CAPACITOR 1UF+-10% 6.3V L6306 BA10577R COIL 10UH

C6314 AA10382R CHIP CAPACITOR 1UF+-10% 6.3V LD1801 CC12281R DIODE TLRMV1020-F
C6315 AA00966R CHIP CAPACITOR 4.7UF+-20% 6.3V LD3451 CC12621R DIODE NECW008AT
C6316 0893333 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 16V LD3452 CC12621R DIODE NECW008AT
C6317 0893333 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 16V LD3453 CC12621R DIODE NECW008AT
C6318 AD10278R CHIP CAPACITOR 100UF+-20% 4V LD3454 CC12621R DIODE NECW008AT

C6319 AA00964R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 2.2UF+-10% 6.3V LD3455 CC12621R DIODE NECW008AT
C6320 AA00968R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 10UF+-20% 6.3V LD3456 CC12621R DIODE NECW008AT
C6321 AA00968R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 10UF+-20% 6.3V PD1801 1331111 PHOTOB DIODE PD410PI
C6322 AA00964R CERAMIC CAPACITOR 2.2UF+-10% 6.3V PG0151 EA13713R PLUG
C6323 AD10891R CHIP CAPACITOR 100UF+-20% 6.3V PG0153 EA13589R PLUG

C6324 0893333 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 16V PG0154 EA13581R PLUG

C6327 AA10872R CHIP CAPACITOR 0.1UF+-10% 10V PG1301 EA11694R PLUG
C6328 0893333 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 16V PG1302 EA13589R PLUG
C6329 AA00966R CHIP CAPACITOR 4.7UF+-20% 6.3V PG1801 EA14631R PLUG
C6330 AD10483R CHIP CAPACITOR 33UF+-20% 6.3V PG1802 EA13571R PLUG

C6331 AA10872R CHIP CAPACITOR 0.1UF+-10% 10V PG2301 EA13711R PLUG

C6332 0893333 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 16V PG2302 EA13711R PLUG
C6333 0893333 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 16V PG3401 EA11695R PLUG
C6334 AA10872R CHIP CAPACITOR 0.1UF+-10% 10V PG3402 EA13182R PLUG
C6336 0893333 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 16V PG3403 EA10362R CONNECTOR

C7001 0893333 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 16V PG7001 EA13681R PLUG

C7002 AA10872R CHIP CAPACITOR 0.1UF+-10% 10V PG7002 EA13851R PLUG
C7004 0893347 CHIP CAPACITOR 0.10UF 16V PG7003 EA14621R PLUG
C7013 AD10266R ELECTROLYTIC 22UF 4V PG7004 EA13571R PLUG
C7014 AD10266R ELECTROLYTIC 22UF 4V PG7008 EA14511R PLUG

C7021 0893333 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01UF+-10% 16V PG7009 EA13703R PLUG

C7022 AA10382R CHIP CAPACITOR 1UF+-10% 6.3V PG8011 EA10504R PLUG
C7023 AA10382R CHIP CAPACITOR 1UF+-10% 6.3V PG8012 EA13581R PLUG
C7024 0893179 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1UF+-10% 16V PG8017 EA14701R PLUG
CN8017 EF12741 CONNECTOR Q1001 CA13471R TRANSISTOR 2SC3930

D1802 5337352 DIODE MA132WA Q1002 CA13471R TRANSISTOR 2SC3930

D3401 CC10937R ZENER DIODE MA8056-M Q1003 1323173 TRANSISTOR UN9212
D3451 5337354 DIODE MA133 Q1301 CA12502R TRANSISTOR 2SC5383-T11-1F
D6301 5337353 DIODE MA132K Q1302 CA10271R TRANSISTOR 2SB1424
IC1301 CK46701U IC UPD168153 Q1303 CA12891R TRANSISTOR RT1N144U-T11-1

IC1302 CK42591R IC NJM13404R Q1304 1323291 TRANSISTOR 2SC4617

IC1303 CK40231R IC SN74AHC1G66HDCK Q1401 1323252 TRANSISTOR XP4501
IC1304 CK43972R IC NJM2827AF285 Q1801 1323279 TRANSISTOR DTC114YE
IC1401 FU10793R GYRO,SENSOR(ENC-03MA-03) Q1802 CA12501R TRANSISTOR 2SC5383-T11
IC1402 FU10794R GYRO,SENSOR(ENC-03MB-03) Q1803 CA11372R TRANSISTOR 2SD2345-S

IC1403 CK25981R IC NJU7018V Q3451 CA10271R TRANSISTOR 2SB1424

IC1801 CE10291R SENSOR,REMOTE(RS-771) Q3452 CA12891R TRANSISTOR RT1N144U-T11-1
IC3401 CK46211R IC CXN3009TQ Q3453 CA12502R TRANSISTOR 2SC5383-T11-1F
IC3501 CK46251R IC DN8797MS Q3454 CA12502R TRANSISTOR 2SC5383-T11-1F
IC3502 CK29741R IC AN48800A Q3455 CA12502R TRANSISTOR 2SC5383-T11-1F

IC3701 CK45761U IC LV4149W Q3456 CA12502R TRANSISTOR 2SC5383-T11-1F

IC6101 CK22341R IC NJM2112V-TE1 Q3457 CA12502R TRANSISTOR 2SC5383-T11-1F
IC6103 CK42511U IC AN2903FJQ-V Q3458 CA12502R TRANSISTOR 2SC5383-T11-1F
IC6201 CK42521R IC AK4565VF Q3701 CA12911R TRANSISTOR 2SA1989-T11-1R
IC7001 CK18021R IC MB88347PFV Q3702 CA12891R TRANSISTOR RT1N144U-T11-1

IC7002 CK43971R IC NJM2872AF34 Q6101 CA12502R TRANSISTOR 2SC5383-T11-1F

JK8101 EY11381R JACK,USB Q6102 CA12502R TRANSISTOR 2SC5383-T11-1F
L3401 BA10577R COIL 10UH Q6103 CA12502R TRANSISTOR 2SC5383-T11-1F
L3402 BA10577R COIL 10UH Q6104 CA12502R TRANSISTOR 2SC5383-T11-1F
L3403 BA10577R COIL 10UH Q6105 CA12502R TRANSISTOR 2SC5383-T11-1F

L3701 BA10143R COIL 10UH Q6108 CA12502R TRANSISTOR 2SC5383-T11-1F

L3702 BA10143R COIL 10UH Q6109 CA12502R TRANSISTOR 2SC5383-T11-1F
L3703 BA10143R COIL 10UH Q6207 CA12781R TRANSISTOR RT1N241U-T11-1
L6103 0773006 COIL 330UH Q6208 CA12781R TRANSISTOR RT1N241U-T11-1
L6301 BA10584R COIL 100UH Q7001 CA11341R TRANSISTOR NDS336P

7-6
SYMBOL P-NO DESCRIPTION SYMBOL P-NO DESCRIPTION
NO NO
Q7002 CA12891R TRANSISTOR RT1N144U-T11-1 R1807 0790041 CHIP RESISTOR 1.8KOHM+-5% 1/16W
Q7009 1323286 TRANSISTOR UMH9N R1811 AQ10344R CHIP RESISTOR 10MOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1001 0790044 CHIP RESISTOR 3.3KOHM+-5% 1/16W R1813 0790033 CHIP RESISTOR 470 OHM+-5% 1/16W
R1002 0790024 CHIP RESISTOR 100 OHM+-5% 1/16W R1814 0790019 CHIP RESISTOR 47 OHM+-5% 1/16W
R1003 0790015 CHIP RESISTOR 22 OHM+-5% 1/16W R3401 0790037 CHIP RESISTOR 1KOHM+-5% 1/16W

R1005 0790041 CHIP RESISTOR 1.8KOHM+-5% 1/16W R3402 AQ00237R CHIP RESISTER 43KOHM+-1% 1/16W
R1006 0790052 CHIP RESISTOR 12KOHM+-5% 1/16W R3403 AQ00237R CHIP RESISTER 43KOHM+-1% 1/16W
R1007 0790051 CHIP RESISTOR 10KOHM+-5% 1/16W R3404 0790051 CHIP RESISTOR 10KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1303 0790234 CHIP RESISTOR 100KOHM+-5% 1/16W[MV580A] R3405 0790064 CHIP RESISTOR 100KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1303 0790237 CHIP RESISTOR 180KOHM+-5% 1/16W[MV550A] R3406 0790064 CHIP RESISTOR 100KOHM+-5% 1/16W

R1308 0790195 CHIP RESISTOR 120 OHM+-5% 1/16W R3408 0790037 CHIP RESISTOR 1KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1310 0790235 CHIP RESISTOR 120KOHM+-5% 1/16W R3411 0790037 CHIP RESISTOR 1KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1312 0790216 CHIP RESISTOR 4.7KOHM+-5% 1/16W R3412 0790037 CHIP RESISTOR 1KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1314 0790216 CHIP RESISTOR 4.7KOHM+-5% 1/16W R3413 0790037 CHIP RESISTOR 1KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1315 0790216 CHIP RESISTOR 4.7KOHM+-5% 1/16W R3414 0790037 CHIP RESISTOR 1KOHM+-5% 1/16W

R1317 0790247 CHIP RESISTOR 1MOHM+-5% 1/16W R3418 0790011 CHIP RESISTOR 10 OHM+-5% 1/16W
R1318 0790221 CHIP RESISTOR 10KOHM+-5% 1/16W [MV580A] R3419 0790011 CHIP RESISTOR 10 OHM+-5% 1/16W
R1318 0790219 CHIP RESISTOR 8.2KOHM+-5% 1/16W [MV550A] R3420 0790011 CHIP RESISTOR 10 OHM+-5% 1/16W
R1319 0790234 CHIP RESISTOR 100KOHM+-5% 1/16W R3422 0790077 CHIP RESISTOR 1MOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1320 0790234 CHIP RESISTOR 100KOHM+-5% 1/16W R3451 0790059 CHIP RESISTOR 47KOHM+-5% 1/16W

R1321 0790234 CHIP RESISTOR 100KOHM+-5% 1/16W R3452 0790037 CHIP RESISTOR 1KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1322 0790234 CHIP RESISTOR 100KOHM+-5% 1/16W R3453 0790044 CHIP RESISTOR 3.3KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1323 AQ00811R CHIP RESISTOR 12KOHM+-1% 1/16W R3454 0790017 CHIP RESISTOR 33 OHM+-5% 1/16W
R1324 AQ00846R CHIP RESISTOR 270KOHM+-1% 1/16W R3455 0790017 CHIP RESISTOR 33 OHM+-5% 1/16W
R1325 AQ00842R CHIP RESISTOR 180KOHM+-1% 1/16W R3456 0790017 CHIP RESISTOR 33 OHM+-5% 1/16W

R1326 AQ00842R CHIP RESISTOR 180KOHM+-1% 1/16W R3457 0790017 CHIP RESISTOR 33 OHM+-5% 1/16W
R1327 AQ00828R CHIP RESISTOR 56KOHM+-1% 1/16W R3458 0790017 CHIP RESISTOR 33 OHM+-5% 1/16W
R1328 0790195 CHIP RESISTOR 120 OHM+-5% 1/16W R3459 0790017 CHIP RESISTOR 33 OHM+-5% 1/16W
R1329 0790229 CHIP RESISTOR 47KOHM+-5% 1/16W [MV580A] R3701 0790221 CHIP RESISTOR 10KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1329 0790226 CHIP RESISTOR 27KOHM+-5% 1/16W [MV550A] R3703 0790225 CHIP RESISTOR 22KOHM+-5% 1/16W

R1330 0790229 CHIP RESISTOR 47KOHM+-5% 1/16W [MV580A] R3704 0790216 CHIP RESISTOR 4.7KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1330 0790226 CHIP RESISTOR 27KOHM+-5% 1/16W [MV550A] R6101 AQ10747R CHIP RESISTOR 3.9KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1332 0790226 CHIP RESISTOR 27KOHM+-5% 1/16W [MV580A] R6102 AQ10747R CHIP RESISTOR 3.9KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1332 0790228 CHIP RESISTOR 39KOHM+-5% 1/16W [MV550A] R6103 0790227 CHIP RESISTOR 33KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1333 0790209 CHIP RESISTOR 1.5KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6104 0790225 CHIP RESISTOR 22KOHM+-5% 1/16W

R1334 0790221 CHIP RESISTOR 10KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6105 0790236 CHIP RESISTOR 150KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1336 0790221 CHIP RESISTOR 10KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6106 0790228 CHIP RESISTOR 39KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1337 0790221 CHIP RESISTOR 10KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6107 0790236 CHIP RESISTOR 150KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1347 0790209 CHIP RESISTOR 1.5KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6108 0790221 CHIP RESISTOR 10KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1348 0790217 CHIP RESISTOR 5.6KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6109 0790221 CHIP RESISTOR 10KOHM+-5% 1/16W

R1349 0790234 CHIP RESISTOR 100KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6110 0790236 CHIP RESISTOR 150KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1350 0790197 CHIP RESISTOR 180 OHM+-5% 1/16W R6111 0790228 CHIP RESISTOR 39KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1355 0790194 CHIP RESISTOR 100 OHM+-5% 1/16W [MV580A] R6112 0790225 CHIP RESISTOR 22KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1355 0790195 CHIP RESISTOR 120 OHM+-5% 1/16W [MV550A] R6113 0790236 CHIP RESISTOR 150KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1364 0790212 CHIP RESISTOR 2.2KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6114 0790221 CHIP RESISTOR 10KOHM+-5% 1/16W

R1370 0790216 CHIP RESISTOR 4.7KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6115 0790221 CHIP RESISTOR 10KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1401 0790045 CHIP RESISTOR 3.9KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6116 0790227 CHIP RESISTOR 33KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1402 0790045 CHIP RESISTOR 3.9KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6117 0790225 CHIP RESISTOR 22KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1403 0790044 CHIP RESISTOR 3.3KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6118 AQ10713R CHIP RESISTOR 100KOHM+-0.5% 1/16W
R1404 0790044 CHIP RESISTOR 3.3KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6119 AQ10713R CHIP RESISTOR 100KOHM+-0.5% 1/16W

R1405 0790024 CHIP RESISTOR 100 OHM+-5% 1/16W R6120 0790227 CHIP RESISTOR 33KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1406 0790024 CHIP RESISTOR 100 OHM+-5% 1/16W R6121 0790217 CHIP RESISTOR 5.6KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1407 AQ00269R CHIP RESISTOR 680KOHM+-1% 0.63W R6122 0790223 CHIP RESISTOR 15KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1408 AQ00269R CHIP RESISTOR 680KOHM+-1% 0.63W R6123 0790207 CHIP RESISTOR 1KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1409 AQ00228R CHIP RESISTOR 20KOHM+-1% 1/16W R6124 AQ10713R CHIP RESISTOR 100KOHM+-0.5% 1/16W

R1410 AQ00228R CHIP RESISTOR 20KOHM+-1% 1/16W R6125 AQ10761R CHIP RESISTOR 47KOHM+-0.5% 1/16W
R1411 0790072 CHIP RESISTOR 390KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6126 0790215 CHIP RESISTOR 3.9KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1412 0790072 CHIP RESISTOR 390KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6127 0790217 CHIP RESISTOR 5.6KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1413 0790037 CHIP RESISTOR 1KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6128 0790223 CHIP RESISTOR 15KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1414 0790037 CHIP RESISTOR 1KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6129 0790207 CHIP RESISTOR 1KOHM+-5% 1/16W

R1415 0790051 CHIP RESISTOR 10KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6130 AQ10713R CHIP RESISTOR 100KOHM+-0.5% 1/16W
R1801 0790033 CHIP RESISTOR 470 OHM+-5% 1/16W R6131 AQ10761R CHIP RESISTOR 47KOHM+-0.5% 1/16W
R1803 0104084 CHIP RESISTOR 2.2MOHM+-5% 1/16W R6132 0790215 CHIP RESISTOR 3.9KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1805 0790071 CHIP RESISTOR 330KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6133 0790216 CHIP RESISTOR 4.7KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R1806 0790046 CHIP RESISTOR 4.7KOHM+-5% 1/16W R6148 AQ10712R CHIP RESISTOR 10KOHM+-0.5% 1/16W

7-7
SYMBOL P-NO DESCRIPTION SYMBOL P-NO DESCRIPTION
NO NO
R6157 AQ10712R CHIP RESISTOR 10KOHM+-0.5% 1/16W R8014 AQ00183R CHIP RESISTOR 390 OHM+-1% 1/16W
R6201 0790207 CHIP RESISTOR 1KOHM+-5% 1/16W R8015 AQ00207R CHIP RESISTOR 3.3KOHM+-1% 1/16W
R6202 0790207 CHIP RESISTOR 1KOHM+-5% 1/16W R8016 AQ00209R CHIP RESISTOR 3.9KOHM+-1% 1/16W
R6205 0790223 CHIP RESISTOR 15KOHM+-5% 1/16W R8017 AQ00187R CHIP RESISTOR 560OHM+-1% 0.063W
R6206 0790223 CHIP RESISTOR 15KOHM+-5% 1/16W R8018 AQ00214R CHIP RESISTOR 5.6KOHM+-1% 1/16W

R6207 0790227 CHIP RESISTOR 33KOHM+-5% 1/16W R8019 AQ00192R CHIP RESISTOR 820 OHM+-1% 1/16W
R6208 0790227 CHIP RESISTOR 33KOHM+-5% 1/16W R8020 AQ00221R CHIP RESISTOR 10KOHM+-1% 1/16W
R6209 0790181 CHIP RESISTOR 10 OHM+-5% 1/16W R8021 AQ00227R CHIP RESISTOR 18KOHM+-1% 1/16W
R6301 0790207 CHIP RESISTOR 1KOHM+-5% 1/16W R8022 AQ00201R CHIP RESISTOR 1.8KOHM+-1% 1/16W
R6302 0790207 CHIP RESISTOR 1KOHM+-5% 1/16W R8023 AQ00236R CHIP RESISTOR 39KOHM+-1% 1/16W

R6304 0790216 CHIP RESISTOR 4.7KOHM+-5% 1/16W R8024 AQ00214R CHIP RESISTOR 5.6KOHM+-1% 1/16W
R6306 0790238 CHIP RESISTOR 220KOHM+-5% 1/16W R8031 AQ00194R CHIP RESISTOR 1.0KOHM+-1% 1/16W
R6307 0790238 CHIP RESISTOR 220KOHM+-5% 1/16W R8033 AQ00192R CHIP RESISTOR 820 OHM+-1% 1/16W
R6308 0790216 CHIP RESISTOR 4.7KOHM+-5% 1/16W R8034 AQ00194R CHIP RESISTOR 1.0KOHM+-1% 1/16W
R6309 0790215 CHIP RESISTOR 3.3KOHM+-5% 1/16W R8035 AQ00194R CHIP RESISTOR 1.0KOHM+-1% 1/16W

R6310 0790221 CHIP RESISTOR 10KOHM+-5% 1/16W R8036 AQ00167R CHIP RESISTOR 100 OHM+-1% 1/16W
R6311 0790229 CHIP RESISTOR 47KOHM+-5% 1/16W R8037 AQ00194R CHIP RESISTOR 1.0KOHM+-1% 1/16W
R6312 0790217 CHIP RESISTOR 5.6KOHM+-5% 1/16W R8038 AQ00181R CHIP RESISTOR 330 OHM+-1% 1/16W
R6313 0790229 CHIP RESISTOR 47KOHM+-5% 1/16W R8039 AQ00198R CHIP RESISTOR 1.5KOHM+-1% 1/16W
R6314 0790211 CHIP RESISTOR 1.8KOHM+-5% 1/16W R8040 AQ00172R CHIP RESISTOR 150OHM+-1% 0.63W

R6316 0790242 CHIP RESISTOR 390KOHM+-5% 1/16W R8101 0790055 CHIP RESISTOR 22KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R6317 0790202 CHIP RESISTOR 390 OHM+-5% 1/16W SW7001 FB10471R SWITCH,TACT
R6318 0790202 CHIP RESISTOR 390 OHM+-5% 1/16W SW8011 FB10591R SWITCH
R6319 0790211 CHIP RESISTOR 1.8KOHM+-5% 1/16W SW8012 FB10471R SWITCH,TACT
R6324 0790229 CHIP RESISTOR 47KOHM+-5% 1/16W SW8013 FB10471R SWITCH,TACT

R6325 0790216 CHIP RESISTOR 4.7KOHM+-5% 1/16W SW8014 FB10471R SWITCH,TACT

R6326 0790181 CHIP RESISTOR 10 OHM+-5% 1/16W SW8015 FB10471R SWITCH,TACT
R6327 0790209 CHIP RESISTOR 1.5KOHM+-5% 1/16W SW8017 FA10171R SWITCH
R6328 0790181 CHIP RESISTOR 10 OHM+-5% 1/16W ZD7002 CC10574R DIODE RD13UM
R6330 0790221 CHIP RESISTOR 10KOHM+-5% 1/16W

R6450 0790214 CHIP RESISTOR 3.3KOHM+-5% 1/16W

R6451 0790214 CHIP RESISTOR 3.3KOHM+-5% 1/16W DZMV550A
R7009 0790181 CHIP RESISTOR 10 OHM+-5% 1/16W
R7010 0790181 CHIP RESISTOR 10 OHM+-5% 1/16W HP13551 EVF ASSY
R7011 0790181 CHIP RESISTOR 10 OHM+-5% 1/16W HP13631 LENS ASSY
HP13744 LCD UNIT
R7012 0790181 CHIP RESISTOR 10 OHM+-5% 1/16W JP39981 AEL PWB
R7013 0790181 CHIP RESISTOR 10 OHM+-5% 1/16W JP40015 MAN PWB
R7014 BM10696R COIL JP40061 FRT PWB
R7016 0790181 CHIP RESISTOR 10 OHM+-5% 1/16W
R7018 BM10349R COIL JP40071 GYR PWB
JP40081 USB (RIBBON CABLE)
R7021 0790201 CHIP RESISTOR 330 OHM+-5% 1/16W JP40091 DRF (RIBBON CABLE)
R7022 0790201 CHIP RESISTOR 330 OHM+-5% 1/16W JP40101 SHE (RIBBON CABLE)
R7023 0790201 CHIP RESISTOR 330 OHM+-5% 1/16W JP40121 SAF (RIBBON CABLE)
R7024 0790024 CHIP RESISTOR 100 OHM+-5% 1/16W JP40411 LCD PWB
R7026 0790194 CHIP RESISTOR 100 OHM+-5% 1/16W JP40481 MR (RIBBON CABLE)
JP40891 SWL PWB
R7031 0790207 CHIP RESISTOR 1KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R7038 0790207 CHIP RESISTOR 1KOHM+-5% 1/16W UA12512 DVD DRIVE MECH
R7049 0790207 CHIP RESISTOR 1KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R7050 0790207 CHIP RESISTOR 1KOHM+-5% 1/16W
R7051 0790181 CHIP RESISTOR 10 OHM+-5% 1/16W DZMV580A
HP13551 EVF ASSY
R7052 0790181 CHIP RESISTOR 10 OHM+-5% 1/16W
R7053 BM10349R COIL
R7054 BM10696R COIL HP13742 LCD UNIT
R7055 BM10696R COIL JP39982 AEL PWB
R7056 BM10696R COIL JP40035 MAN PWB
JP40151 FRT PWB
R7057 BM10696R COIL JP40161 GYR PWB
R7058 0790181 CHIP RESISTOR 10 OHM+-5% 1/16W JP40171 USB (RIBBON CABLE)
R7060 0790068 CHIP RESISTOR 220KOHM+-5% 1/16W JP40181 DRF (RIBBON CABLE)
R7061 0790073 CHIP RESISTOR 470KOHM+-5% 1/16W JP40191 SHE (RIBBON CABLE)
R7065 BM10345R COIL
JP40211 SAF (RIBBON CABLE)
R7089 BM10696R COIL JP40411 LCD PWB
R7090 BM10696R COIL JP40481 MR (RIBBON CABLE)
R8011 AQ00198R CHIP RESISTOR 1.5KOHM+-1% 1/16W JP40901 SWL PWB
R8012 AQ00176R CHIP RESISTOR 220 OHM+-1% 1/16W UA12512 DVD DRIVE MECH
R8013 AQ00203R CHIP RESISTOR 2.2KOHM+-1% 1/16W

CH 1
7-8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

S Schematic & Wiring Diagrams

S-1 DZ-MV580A Wiring Diagram CN0152
F 6PIN To F
MICROPHONE ACCESSORY SHOE

6PIN

PG1401

PG1802
FRT-H
PG1801 GYR-H
10PIN

CN3401

PG0154
E E
LENS PG0151
UNIT
6PIN SHE-H
MR 23PIN
40PIN PG0153 22PIN 22PIN
EVF
PG3403
UNIT

25PIN PG1301
CN7004 CN8012
PG7003
PG3401
24PIN PG7009
PG3402
PG7008 6PIN
D LCD 25PIN
6PIN SAF-H D
AEL-H PG7004

PG7002 PG8012
FOR ADJUSTMENT
LCD PG8011
PANEL PG7001

DISC DRIVE UNIT SEN-H SWL2 11PIN

CN8017

LOCK
UNIT 120PIN SIDE CASE-L
(OPERATION SWITCH)
16PIN
2PIN
C PG1002 C
PG9404

51PIN 70PIN

HDM PG8017
6PIN

PG9702
PG2301
PG2001
SWL3-H
PG1501
SLID 4PIN
PG9403
MOTOR PG2002

DRF-H
B SPINDLE
15PIN
DRV-R PG9701
B
MOTOR PG2302
MAN-H PG0501
12PIN BATTERY
TERMINAL
PG9404
PG5001 PG1503
PG9103
AV INPUT/
OUTPUT J6002
REAR COVER
MOD 51PIN
JACK PG1502
8PIN
ZOOM/DISC EJECT/
70PIN EXTERNAL REC BUTTON
MICROPHONE J6001
JACK 6PIN
PG9301
PG9401 CN8101
JK8101
PC CONNECTION

A DISC COVER TERMINAL

20PIN A
CARD INSERTION BLOCK/
POWER SWITCH/SPEAKER
USB-H

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S-1
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

S-2 DZ-MV550A Wiring Diagram

MICROPHONE
6PIN PG0153
F 6PIN
PG0154 F
22PIN 22PIN
EVF
UNIT
PG1802
FRT PG1401 SHE
PG1801

10PIN GYR
CN3401
LENS PG0151
UNIT

6PIN
E E
MR 22PIN
PG3403
40PIN

PG1302
25PIN

CN7004 CN8012
PG7003
PG3401
24PIN PG7009
PG3402
PG7008 6PIN
LCD 25PIN
SAF
AEL PG7004
6PIN

D D
PG7002 PG8012
FOR ADJUSTMENT
LCD PG8011
PANEL PG7001
CN8017
DISC DRIVE UNIT SWL2 11PIN

LOCK 16PIN
UNIT SIDE CASE-L
(OPERATION SWITCH)
120PIN 2PIN

PG9404

C 51PIN 70PIN C
HDM PG8017
6PIN

PG9702
PG2301
PG2001
SWL3
PG1501
SLID 4PIN
MOTOR PG9403 PG2002

DRV-R DRF
15PIN
SPINDLE PG9701

MOTOR PG2302
MAN PG0501
12PIN BATTERY
TERMINAL
B B
PG9404
PG5001 PG1503
PG9103
AV INPUT/
J6002
OUTPUT REAR COVER
MOD 51PIN
JACK PG1502
8PIN
ZOOM/DISC EJECT/
EXTERNAL REC BUTTON
70PIN
MICROPHONE J6001
JACK 6PIN
PG9301
PG9401 CN8101
JK8101
PC CONNECTION
DISC COVER TERMINAL
20PIN
CARD INSERTION BLOCK/
POWER SWITCH/SPEAKER
A USB A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S-2
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1F 2F 3F 4F 5F 6F 7F 8F
S-3 GYR-H/GYR S-4 FRT-H/FRT

F F

1E 2E 3E 4E 5E 6E 7E 8E
1.3 1.3

0 3.1

E E

To
MICROPHONE

To
BTB [AEL-H/AEL]
1D 2D
1.3 1.3 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D
PG7003 8D
0 3.1

D V_GYRO D

H_GYRO

REMOTE
CONT.

REC INDI.
RECEIVER
MV580A:To SHE-H PG0154
MV550A:To SHE PG0154 -
1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 3.0
0
8C0
-
-

0
3.1 (64)
0
3.1 1.3 1.3
C 5H C
0 1.3
1.3

CODE PART NAME

DET LE 2SC5383T11
3.1 1.3 0 1.3
0 1.3 1.3 0 1ZS 2SD2345-S
64 DTC114TYE (MO)
MO MA132WA 4.8
-
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6BREC MODE
ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR 7B -
(1ZS) 8B
4.8
-
(LE)
-

B GYR-H/GYR B
WB IR RECEIVER
CODE PART NAME
5H XP4501
ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE
FRT-H/FRT

1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A

A A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S-3
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1F 2F 3F 4F 5F 6F 7F 8F
S-5 DRF-H/DRF S-6 SWL3-H/SWL3

F F

1E 2E 3E 4E 5E 6E 7E 8E
QUICK MODE
OFF

To
ON
SWL2
E CN8017 E
SWL3-H/SWL3

1D 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D 8D

D D

1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 8C

C C

1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B
To MAN To DISC DRIVE
PG2002 UNIT
(DRV-R PG9701)

B B

1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A

A DRF-H/DRF A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S-4
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1F 2F 3F 4F 5F 6F 7F 8F
S-7 SHE-H S-8 SHE

F F

1E 2E 3E 4E 5E 6E 7E 8E

To
SHOE
TERMINAL
E E

1D 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D 8D

EVF_5V
D D

To To
GYR-H To GYR
PG1401 EVF UNIT PG1401

C0153
0.01

1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 8C

C EVF_5V C

To BTB [AEL]
To

PG7009
EVF UNIT

1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B
To BTB [AEL-H]
PG7009

B B

1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A

SHE
A A

SHE-H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S-5
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1F 2F 3F 4F 5F 6F 7F 8F
S-9 USB-H/USB S-11 MR

F F

3.2
0

1E 2E 3E 4E 5E 3.2
6E 7E 8E
FLC181Z16SMMZ

REVERSE
SW REVERSE

E E

PC TERMINAL To
MAN-H/MAN
PG5001

USB-H/USB To LCD
PG3403
3.2
1D 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 0 7D 8D
3.2

D OPEN/CLOSE D
SW

ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE

MR

1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 8C
S-10 SAF-H/SAF

C C

1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B

B B

To To
SWL2 BTB [AEL-H/AEL]
PG8012 PG7004

SAF-H/SAF
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A

A A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S-6
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1F 2F 3F 4F 5F 6F 7F 8F
S-12 LCD

F F
(AE)
4.8 4.8
CODE PART NAME

NECW008AT

NECW008AT

NECW008AT

NECW008AT

NECW008AT

NECW008AT
4.1 AE 2SB1424R
LF 2SC5383-T11-1F
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 N5 RT1N144U-T11-1
1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 MP MA133
(LF) (LF) (LF) (LF) (LF) (LF)
5.6 MA8056-M
1E 2E 0.1 3E 0.7 0.7 4E 0.7 0.7 5E
0.7 0.7 6E 7E 8E
3.2
ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE

(MP)
(N5) 0

E E

To MR
CN3401

1
1D2 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D 8D
3
4
5
6
D 7
D
8 4.8 0 0 0 3.2 0 0

9
10 2.5
2.0 3.5
11 4.0 0
4.0
1.2 3.5
12 0
4.0 0
3.5
13
1C14 2C 3C 4C 0 5C 3.5 6C 7C 8C
1.7
15
2.8 3.5 3.2
16 LCD DRIVER 0 (5.6)
-
17 3.5
- 0 0
18
C 19
- 3.2 3.2 3.5
C
0 0.1 0
20
0 3.5
21
3.2
22 0.1

23 1.3 1.2 0 1.7 2.8 0 3.2 0

24
25
1B To
2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B
BTB [AEL-H/AEL]
PG7008

To B
B LCD PANEL

1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A

LCD

A A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S-7
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1F 2F 3F 4F 5F 6F 7F 8F
S-13 SEN-H

F F

1E 2E 3E 4E 5E 6E 7E 8E
( PB: 0
REC:
15
0
-7

E E

( PB: 0

15.0
10.5
REC: 0
-7

0
1D 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D 8D
CCD IMAGE SENSOR

-7.0
D PB: 10.5 D
REC: 10.5

(PB: 12.0
REC: 13.3
10.0
32.0
10.0

1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 8C

2SC3930
14.7
C 10.5 10.5 C

47/10
10.5 0
9.8 8.2 (8B)
2SC3930
0
7.5

1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B

CODE PART NAME

To
8B UN9212 MAN-H
PG2001
B ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE B
SEN-H

1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A

A A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S-8
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1F 2F 3F To LCD
PG3401
4F 5F 6F 7F 8F

25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
S-14 BTB [AEL-H/AEL] 1A
2A

Components marked * are different between DZ-MV580A and 3A

4A
DZ-MV550A: Refer to the difference tables in diagrams for the 5A
F different components. 6A F
7A

BM10349R
BM10696R
BM10696R
BM10696R
BM10696R
BM10696R
C7021 Q7001 Q7002 R7060 R7061 R7065 ZD7002 8A
9A
MV580A 0.01 336 N5 220k 470k BM10345R RD13UMB1
10A

BM10349R
BM10696R
BM10696R
MV550A
11A LENS DRIVE
Not Provided
12A 1A-22A
13A
CODE PART NAME 14A
1E N5 2E
RT1N144U-T11-1 3E 4E 5E 6E 7E 8E 15A
H9 UMH9N 16A
17A
336 NDS336P
18A
ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE 19A
TWO VOLTAGES:PB AND (REC) MODE FOR ADJUSTMENT
20A
21A
E 22A E

19C
20C
21C
22C

1D 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D 8D 24C
25C
2.8 1.2

NJM2872AF34
26C

3V REG
IC7002 27C
5 4 28C
23C
4.6 0 4.6 30C
REG
D VSS
D
29C
To 1 2 3
31C
FRT-H/FRT
32C
PG1801
R7031 33C
1k
34C
36C

37C

1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 8C 38C
39C
To 40C
SAF-H/SAF 41C
CN7004 AUD
42C
1C-43C
11C
TL7030 TL7028 4.8 5C
4.8 3.1
C 0
0 0
6C C
7C
0
8C
1.7
10C
1.7
9C
1.1(0)
12C
3.3 3.1 3.1
0
13C
0 0
14C
15C
16C
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B M/M
7B 8B 35C
17C
18C
1C
2C
3C
43C
B B
MV580A 4C

BM10345R 0 (336)7.4

7.1 20B
C7021
0.01 21B
MV580A : To SHE-H PG0151
22B
MV550A : To SHE PG0151
MV580A 6.8 23B
0
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 0
(N5) 7A 8A 24B
25B
26B EVF
27B 20B-33B
28B
29B
0 0 0 30B

A To MAN-H/MAN PG1501
31B
A
0 0 32B
10B
11B
12B
13B
14B
15B
16B
17B
18B
19B

0 33B
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
9B

(H9)
EVF EVF
1B-9B 10B-19B
BTB [AEL-H/AEL]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S-9
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1F 2F 3F 4F 5F 6F 7F 8F
S-15 LENS DRIVE [AEL-H/AEL] Components marked * are different between DZ-MV580A and
MV550A
DZ-MV550A: Refer to the difference tables in diagrams for the
different components.
F F
PG1301 PG1302 C1316 C1324 C1333 R1303 R1318 R1329 R1330 R1332 R1336 R1348 R1350 R1355 R1364
Not Not Not Not
MV580A Provided 560p 0.01 100k 10k 47k 47k 27k 0 100 2.2k
Provided Provided Provided Provided
Not Not
MV550A Provided 0.068 0.22 2.2 180k 8.2k 27k 27k 39k 10k 5.6k 180 120
Provided Provided

1E 2E 3E 4E 5E 6E 7E 8E

2.5 2A
To (2.5 or 0.1)
LENS 7A
8.0 (AE) 5.1

(LF)
UNIT
E 0
E
0 8A
(0 or 0.7)
7.2
9A
MV580A:27k 10A
MV580A:47k MV550A:39k
MV550A:27k

MV580A:47k 18A
19A
MV580A:100 MV550A:27k
1D 2D 3D MV550A:120 4D 5D 6D 7D 8D 15A
14A
12A
13A

MV550A:180

MV550A:0.068
MV580A:560p
MV580A:0
7.4 8.0 1.2 4.8 0 0 0 0

R1350
MV580A : 3.7
MV550A : 3.1
D 1.3 D
( PB: 0 3.1 0

MV550A:8.2k
MV580A:10k
1.0 REC: 3.1 0
3.1 0 0
(1.4) 3.1
( PB: 3.1
REC: 3.1
0
0 0
0 0(0.5-2.7) 5A
0

0 0
MV580A:0.01
5.1
FOCUS/ZOOM 0
1C 2C 3C 4C MV550A:0.22
MV580A 5C 1.4 IRIS DRIVE 6C 0 7C 8C
To 1.4 0
LENS
2.2k 1.4 0
UNIT
1.4
3.1 0
1.4 1.0(0.2-2.6) 0
0.9
MV580A:100k
C MV550A:180k
3A C
C1333
1.4 1.4 1.4 1.9 0.1 1.0 2.8 3.1 0
2.2
17A
R1336
10k 16A
MV550A MV580A : 3.7
MV550A : 3.1

1B 2B 3B 4B R1348
5B 6B 7B 8B
5.6k 4A
MV550A 1A

2.8 2.8 1.3

MV580A 1.5
B (BQ) NJM2872AF285 B
1.0 3V REG
IC1303 F DET
5 4
4.8 or 0
VCC 4.8 0 4.8
4.8
0.5
(0.2-2.6) F DET 6A
GND 4.8
V+
1 2 3 A
1.4

1.4
1A IC1304
2A 0.5
(0.2-2.6) 0
3A 0
B 1.4

1.4
4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 11A
5 4 GND 20A
1.8
(0.2-2.6) 21A
REG 4.8
(4.8 or 0) 22A
VSS
0 CODE PART NAME
1 2 3 (0 or 3.1)
AE 2SB1424R BTB
A 1A-22A A
0 (N5)
BQ 2SC4617
LF 2SC5383-T11-1F
N5 RT1N144U-T11-1 LENS DRIVE [AEL-H/AEL]
ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE
TWO VOLTAGES:PB AND (REC) MODE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S-10
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1F 2F 3F 4F 5F 6F 7F 8F
S-16 AUD [AEL-H/AEL]
(LF)
4.0 4.7
F F
4.7
19C
4.0 4.0 20C
2.3 2.2
1.3 2.2

(LF)
21C
(LF)
1.7 22C
0.7
(LF) 1.6 23C
24C
25C

1E 2E 3E 0
0 4E 5E 3.1
6E 7E 8E 26C
27C
2.4 2.4 2.4 4.7 2.4 2.4 2.4
0
( PB:
REC: 0
0
28C

MIC AMP
29C
1C (N2)
30C
2C 3.1 3.1
0 0
3C
E 2.4 2.4 2.4 0 2.4 2.4 2.4 E
BTB 3.1 3.1 0 3.1
1C-3C TL6101

A/D & D/A CONV.

4.0
(PB: 1.4
REC: 1.4 0.5
2.2 1.4
4.0 TL6102
2.2 (LF)
2.3 1.3
1.6
(LF) (LF)
1.7 0.7 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 0 3.1 3.1
1.4 0.5

1D 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D 8D
0
0

0 BTB
19C-43C
(N2)

D D

4C

5C
6C
31C
32C
1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 8C 33C
34C

35C
1.5
1.7 ( PB:
REC: 0.5
1.0
36C

(PB:
REC: 3.5
1.2

1.5
C ( PB: 0
REC:
3.1
0
( PB:
REC: 0
0.5 C
7C 37C
38C
8C
39C
9C 40C
1.4

10C ( PB:
REC: 0.4
0.6 41C
42C
11C (MI) 43C
0 3.2 3.2 0 0 1.2 1.7 4.8 0.6(0.4)
12C
1B BTB 2B 3B 4B 5B 4.8
6B 7B 8B
4C-18C 13C

3.1 4.8 3.0

(PB:
REC: 3.7
1.0
0
(PB:
REC: 0
1.6 0.5
0
0
4.8 3.4 0

B (PB:
REC: 2.2
2.0 1.2
0 (PB:
REC: 1.2
1.3
3.0(0) B
1.6 CODE PART NAME
3.0(0)
1.5
( PB:
REC: 1.2
1.1 1.4
LF 2SC5383-T11-1F
VIDOE/AUDIO
1.4 AMP N2 RT1N144U-T11-1
1.5 1.6 0.5 3.1
MI MA132K
1.5 2.4 1.0 4.3
3.1 0 ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE
14C
1.5 3.1(0) TWO VOLTAGES:PB AND (REC) MODE
0 3.0
15C
1A 2A
16C 3A 4A 1.5 5A 0 6A 7A 8A
3.1 4.8 1.0 2.9 1.6 1.6 0 0 0 1.6 2.2 - 0 -
(0)
2.4 1.0

A A

17C
18C
AUD [AEL-H/AEL]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S-11
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1F 2F 3F 4F 5F 6F 7F 8F
S-17 EVF [AEL-H/AEL]

F F

1E 2E 3E 4E 5E 6E 7E 4.3 4.3
8E
21B

3.6
20B

0.1
E E

(N5)
3.1

33B

TL3701
1D 23B
2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D (GND)
8D

4.2 8.8 1.5 1.4 0 1.5 8.8 0 1.5 0 0 0

3.0 0
D D
0 3.0
0
3.5 5.0
1.5
2.0 3.1 10B
- 6.4 6.5 0 9B
0.8 0.8
BTB - 3.0 11B
20B-33B - 0 8B
3.1
3.0 12B
0
3.0 7B
1C 2C 3C 0
4C 3.0
EVF DRIVER 5C
3.0
0 6C 7C 8C 13B
3.1
0 0 6B
28B 0
3.1
0 0 14B
27B BTB
0 3.1 5B
0 1B-19B
0 15B
3.1
0 0 4B
C 26B
0
3.0
0
C
3B
25B
16B
24B 3.1
3.0 1.4 0 0 3.0 3.2 0 0 3.1 3.1 0 0 0 17B
2B
3.1
0 18B
32B 1B
19B

1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B

22B
30B
31B CODE PART NAME
B 29B N5 RT1N144U-T11-1 B
ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE

EVF [AEL-H/AEL]

1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A

A A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S-12
 1 2 3 4
1F 2F 3F 4F
S-18 SWL2

F F

DISC
NAVIGATION

1E 2E 3E 4E

To
SWL3-H/SWL3 SELECT
PG8017
E E

MENU

1D 2D 3D 4D

D D
STOP/EXIT

1C 2C 3C 4C

C C
To
SIDE CASE-L

1B 2B 3B 4B

L UP

B CENTER B
LOW R

To
SAF-H/SAF
CN8012 JOYSTICK

1A 2A 3A SWL24A

A A

1 2 3 4
S-13
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

S-19 IC BLOCK
IC3401 IC3701

GNDCOM
SIGCENT

VCCCOM

COMOUT
PSIG OUT
COM OUT
LV4149W

COMREF
SYNC IN

FBCOM
COMDC
DA OUT
CXM3009TQ

GOUT

CSHO
ROUT

CSVO
GND2

BOUT
VCC2
F F

SHIN
R/R-Y
B/B-Y

FBG
FBR

FBB
GND

Vcc1
EVF DRIVER

REF
+3V
G/Y
LCD DRIVER 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
DA OUT
DA
PICTURE- SIG.C Buf Buf Buf Buf
SYNC COM DC
GAIN PICTURE-FO MODE BLKL1
SEP +5V RMTL1
VCOREF 1 36 Vcc2 VCC1 49 32 VSS2
SYNC ATT COM-
PICTURE COM-DC 2.5V
SEL LEVEL
SYNC ATT POL SW POL SW
FILTER 2 MATRIX 35 G OUT OSDOUT 50 Buf 31 VD
HUE
DL SEL COM- COM-DC R-BRT SUB
ATT COLOR COM
LEVEL NC 51 B-BRT BRIGHT COM-BRT 30 ENB
VCO BRIGHT
GND 3 34 R OUT
CLOCK CONT R-CONT
GENERATOR VREG 52 REG BRIGHT BRT 29 XENB
HUE COLOR VGATE VCNT VPAL1
RPD 4 PHASE 33 B OUT SUB
COMPARATOR RIN 53 CLAMP CNTRST 28 CKV1
LPF SUB- USER- CNTRST
CONTRAST S/H
E +3V TRAP CONTRAST BRIGHT
GIN 54 CLAMP CNTRST VPAL2 27 CKV2 E
Vcc1 5 32 GND B-CONT VPIN
CK LPF TRAP SUB- SUB- CONTRAST USER- POL GAMMA-2
SUB GAMMA
RP CONT R CONT B BRIGHT BIN 55 CLAMP CNTRST GAMMA-1 FRP 26 STV
SEN 6 IR POL 31 GND CNTRST BRT VCO-ADJ
GAMMA1 SUB- W/B CONT COM-BRT
S/H RESET 56 25 XSTV
GAMMA2 BRIGHT LIMITER POL R-BRT D/A R-CONT
SERIAL B-BRT B-CONT
SCK 7 30 GND SYNC IN 57 M FILTER SYNC SEP V SEP GAMMA-1 BLKL1 24 DSG
I/F -1 -2 SUB- SUB- GAMMA-2 RMTL1
BRIGHT R BRIGHT B SIG C COM DC
+3V VSEP IC 58 23 XDSG
SDAT 8 29 VDD

STD BLK FRP XCLP XSTBY SH1 SH2 SH3 SH4 VDIN 59 HAFC 22 TEST7
TEST1 9 28 VDO PLL COUNTER HCNT
HDIN 60 L DECODER H-PULSE 21 TEST6
SERIAL
H.FILTER
I/F
XCLR 10 27 HDO TEST1 61 20 CKH1
IN/EXT CLP
PLL SPLK
TIMING GENERATOR
COUNTER TEST2 62 19 CKH2
D VD 11 26 POF HGATE
PD D
H-SKEN DET
CLPIN 63 18 STH
GND 12 25 GND VCOADJ
GND1 64 VCO 17 XSTH

SERIAL
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 BUS I/F BLSW BLHD HD
RGT

HCK1

HCK2

WIDE

HST

VDD
+3V

PCG

XSTB

DWN

EN

VCK

VST
IC6103 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

AN2903FJQ-V

VDD1

RPD

VSS1

TEST4

TEST5

LOAD

DATA

SCLK

TEST8

TEST3

VDD2

VDD0

BLSW

BLHD

HD

VSS0
VIDEO AMP
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
GND GND
AND IF
DY

C 49 15dB
GCA
3dB
32 IC1301 C
ATT UPD168153

OSC IN
RESET

HREF
50 DV STB -9dB 31

VDD

HO+
H.G.

F.No
VH+
EXT

HO-
FOCUS/ZOOM/IRIS DRIVE

VH-
HR
15dB
LPF 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
51 DOS DOS BUFF 30
W B CLAMP
H2
52 MIX 29 VM 37 24 REFO

15dB H1
53 DC 28 A1 38 H3 23 REFI

DOS GCA BPF ATT

54 BUFF GND 27 A2 39 22 CONT+
B 3dB -9dB CH H0
OUTPUT
B1 40 STAGE 21 CONT-
55 S-DC 26 H4
EVR CONT
CTL PGND 41 20
56 25 OUT
B VREF B
B2 42 1/N 19 VSHT
57 EVR MUTE LPF 24
D2 43 18 IRM-
VREF
58 SP EVR MUTE LPF 23
PGND 44 D/A 17 PGND2
59 VCC 22 CH CONVERTER
D1 45 OUTPUT & 16 IRM+
STAGE DRIVE
60 MUTE 21
MUTE MUTE TC CONTROL IRIS
C2 46 H5 15 VIR
LOGIC
61 VCC MUTE 20
SP DC SHIFT DC SHIFT DC SHIFT DC SHIFT CTL C1 47 14 EIR+
MUTE
62 VCC CTL 19
VM 48 SERIAL-PARARELLE 13 EIR-
DECORDER
2.2K
A 63 GND 18
SP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 A

SDATA

SCLK

LATCH

VD

OPEN

CLOSE

LGND

VAMP

CEXT

VB

REG(B)
64 17

EXT
1/2VCC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S-14
C Circuit Board Diagrams C-2 GYR
C-1 GYR-H

PG1401 PG1401

GYR -SIDE A-
GYR-H -SIDE A-

GYR-H -SIDE B- GYR -SIDE B-

[PATTERN No.JD1176-4] [PATTERN No.JD1175-3]

C-1
C-3 FRT-H C-4 FRT

FRT-H -SIDE A- FRT -SIDE A-

PD1801 PD1801

FRT-H -SIDE B- FRT -SIDE B-

[PATTERN No.JD1176-4] [PATTERN No.JD1175-3]

C-2
C-5 DRF-H/DRF C-6 SHE

36 BA1801

36
40 21

DRF-H -SIDE A- DRF-H -SIDE B-

[PATTERN No.JD1176-4] 1 20

SHE -SIDE B-
SHE -SIDE A- [PATTERN No.JD1175-3]
70 36
1 35

35 1

36 70

DRF -SIDE A- DRF -SIDE B-

[PATTERN No.JD1175-3]

C-3
C-7 SHE-H C-8 SWL3-H/SWL3/SWL2

CN0152

SWL3-H -SIDE A- SWL3-H -SIDE B-

[PATTERN No.JD1176-4]

BA1801 SWL3 -SIDE A- SWL3 -SIDE B-

C0153
[PATTERN No.JD1175-3]

SHE-H -SIDE B-
SHE-H -SIDE A- [PATTERN No.JD1176-4]

SWL2 -SIDE A- SWL2 -SIDE B-

[PATTERN No.JA2255-1]

C-4
C-9 USB-H/USB C-10 MR

CN3401
CN8101

USB-H -SIDE A- USB-H -SIDE B-

[PATTERN No.JD1176-4]

CN8101
5

USB -SIDE A- USB -SIDE B- MR

[PATTERN No.JD1175-3] [PATTERN No.JA2269-1]

C-5
C-11 LCD

4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
4C 3C 2C 1C
C 1C
1C 2C
C 3C
C 4C
C C C C

4B 3
3B 2B
2B 1B
B 1B
1 B 2B
B 3B
B 4B

B B B B

4A
A 3A
3 A TL3418 2A
2A 1A 1A 2A 3A 4A
4A

A A A A

4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4

LCD -SIDE A- LCD -SIDE B-

[PATTERN No.JA2244-4]

C-6
C-12 SEN-H C-13 SAF-H/SAF

CN7004 CN8012

IC1001
1 7
SAF-H -SIDE A-

PG1002 14 8

SAF-H -SIDE B-
[PATTERN No.JD1176-4]

SEN-H -SIDE A-

CN7004 CN8012

SAF -SIDE A-

SAF -SIDE B-
[PATTERN No.JD1175-3]
SEN-H -SIDE B-
[PATTERN No.JD1176-4]

C-7
C-14 AEL-H/AEL
4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4

4H 3H 2H 1H
1 H 1H
1 H 2H 3H 4H
H H H H

R7031
4G 3G
3G 2G 1G
G 1G
1G 2G 3G
3G 4G
G G G G

4F
4 F 3F
3 F 2F
2 F 1F
1F 1F
1F 2F
2F 3F
3 F 4F
4F
1 60
F F F F
MV580A MV550A
120 61
PG1301 Provided Not Provided
PG1302 Not Provided Provided
C1316 560p 0.068
4E
E 3E
3 E 2E
2E 1E C1324 0.01 0.22 1E
1E 2E 3E
3E 4E
4E
C1333 Not Provided 2.2
C7021 0.01 Not Provided TL3701
E E R1303 100k 180k
E (GND) E
R1318 10k 8.2k
R1329 47k 27k
20 21 C7201 R1330 47k 27k
R1332 27k 39k
4D
D 3D
3 D 2D 1D
1D R1336 Not Provided 10k 1D
D 2D
2D 3D
3 D 4
4D
R1348 Not Provided 5.6k
TL7041
D D R1350 0 180 D D
1 40 R1355 100 120
R1364 2.2k Not Provided
R7060 220k
R7061 470k

4C 3C
3C 2C
2C 1C
1C R7065
Q7001
BM10345R
NDS336P
Not Provided
1C
1 C 2C
2C 3
3C 4C
TL6102
Q7002 RT1N144U-T11-1
C C ZD7002 RD13UMB-1 C TL6101
C
Components marked * are different between DZ-MV580A and
DZ-MV550A: Refer to the difference tables in diagrams for the
different components.

4B 3B 2B
B 1B
B 1B
B 2B
2B 3B 4B
B B B B

4A 3A
A 2A
2 A 1A 1A 2A
2 A 3A 4A
TL3715
A A A A
TL7028

TL7030

4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
AEL-H/AEL -SIDE A- AEL-H/AEL -SIDE B-
[PATTERN No.JA2237-4]

C-8
C-15 MAN-H/MAN

3.1
8.0
3.2 3.2

12
3.1

62
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.0 1
3.2
TL6006

56
3.2
3.2
4.6 3.2
3.2
Information of MAN-H/MAN,DRV-R, TL6009
3.1 3.1
25 MOD and HDM Circuit Boards
MV580A : 15.0
MV550A: 12.0 During servicing, replace the entire MAN-H/
MAN circuit board, and the entire disc drive
31

3.1
TL6010
3.1 unit, including the DRV-R, MOD and HDM MV580A : 3.7
circuit boards. 4.8 12.0 2.5 3.2
MV550A : 3.1

Because of this servicing method, this

60 24 17 14 10 1
service manual includes only the simplified
7.9 7.9 MV580A
-7.0 3.1 circuit board diagrams, and does not include 61 78 80 83 97 102 120
MV550A : 12.0
TL2089
any schematic circuit diagrams. 7.9 4.8 8.5 MV580A : 15.0

1,3 5,7
3.0 3.1 4.8
TL2091
TL2090 The simplified circuit board diagrams show 4.8 8.0 MV550A : -7.0
3.1
TL2085 the major voltage values: Refer to them MV580A : -7.0
TL2084
TL2086 during troubleshooting. 3.1
TL2095
TL2082
3.1 3.1
3.1 3.1

14
MV550A
3.1 MV580A
3.1
MV580A MV550A
MV580A : 3.4
IC2004 Provided Not Provided 3.1 3.1
3.1 MV550A : 3.1
IC2008 Provided Not Provided 5.1 5.1

IC6001 Provided Not Provided

PG2001 16PIN 14PIN
3.4
MV580A
Components marked * are different between DZ-MV580A and
DZ-MV550A: Refer to the difference tables in diagrams for the
different components.
3.2 3.2
Note: Voltage values are in REC status. 3.1
3.1 3.1 TL1536
TL1534 3.1
3.1 3.1
3.2 3.2
3.1 3.1
3.2

10
TL1535 3.2 3.1 3.1
3.2
3.2

TL0522 3.2 3.2

TL0515

TL0504

2.5 2.5
7.9 2.5
TL0513

TL0510

2.5
TL0511

70

1
-7.9 2.5
-7.0 TL0512 2.5
2.5
2.5
-7.9
7.9
7.9

F0503

F0504

F0501

F0502

25
3.3
2.5 2.5

30
7.9 4.8 4.8

40
7.9 4.7 4.7

36

35
TL1543 TL1547 TL0521(GND)
TL0520
TL0517 (GND)
TL0518

MAN-H/MAN -SIDE A- MAN-H/MAN -SIDE B-

[PATTERN No.JA2226-3]

C-9
C-16 DRV-R C-17 MOD

Information of MAN-H/MAN,DRV-R,
MOD and HDM Circuit Boards
During servicing, replace the entire MAN-H/
MAN circuit board, and the entire disc drive
unit, including the DRV-R, MOD and HDM
circuit boards.
Because of this servicing method, this
service manual includes only the simplified
circuit board diagrams, and does not include
any schematic circuit diagrams.
Note: Voltage values are in reading status.
The simplified circuit board diagrams show
Supplement: Since the DVD disc drive is intermittently operated, the major voltage values: Refer to them
set to the reading status in which laser light is emitted from the pickup. during troubleshooting.
Note: Voltage values are in reading status.
Supplement: Since the DVD disc drive is intermittently operated,
set to the reading status in which laser light is emitted from the pickup.

4.6
4.6

3.4

4.7
4.7 4.7

3.3

3.3 2.5 4.8 4.7

1 25 30 35

70 40 36 3.3

3.3 2.5
4.8 4.7

3.4

3.3

3.3 3.4

4.7
11

12

4.7
2.1 3.3
4.7 4.8
20

2.2 3.3
57 60 4.8
4.8
27

2.5 4.7 4.7 4.7

4.8 4.8
81 85 89

2.1
4.8

2.1
47 43 41

3.3
46 42

4.8 4.8 4.7

4.8
4.8 4.6
4.8 4.7
4.7 MOD -SIDE A- MOD -SIDE B-
4.8 4.8 3.3 4.6
4.7 4.7
[PATTERN No.JA2238-3]
4.8 4.8 4.7
8 11 3.4

2.5 4.8 4.8 4.8

4.7

DRV-R -SIDE A- DRV-R -SIDE B-

[PATTERN No.JA2238-3]

C-10
C-18 HDM

Note: Voltage values are in reading status.

Example: 24 (4.7): Terminal no. (voltage value)
Supplement: Since the DVD disc drive is intermittently operated,
set to the reading status in which laser light is emitted from the pickup.

Information of MAN-H/MAN,DRV-R,
MOD and HDM Circuit Boards
1 During servicing, replace the entire MAN-H/
(4.8)
MAN circuit board, and the entire disc drive
unit, including the DRV-R, MOD and HDM
circuit boards.
Because of this servicing method, this
service manual includes only the simplified
circuit board diagrams, and does not include
any schematic circuit diagrams.

HDM -SIDE A- The simplified circuit board diagrams show

the major voltage values: Refer to them HDM -SIDE B-
during troubleshooting.

25 21 20 17
(4.9)(4.9)(4.9) (4.9)
5(4.9) 6(4.9)
27 26 25 17 16
10(4.9)
(3.1) 9(4.9)
11(3.1)

32 1 9 10
14 3 8
(4.8) (3.1) (4.9)

41(4.8) 40(4.8)

C-11
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B Block Diagrams
B-1 Video/Audio Signal Process
F F
AEL-H/AEL
MV580A: PG1301 SDO,
MV550A: PG1302 SCLK, SWL2
CS_LENS
IC1301 IC1503
FOCUS MOTOR
43, 45-47 2-4
TL0504 MAN-H/MAN PG1501 PG7001 SAF-H/ DISC NAVI./ FULL AUTO/
FOCUS/ (REG_ON) SAF MENU/STOP/ FOCUS/EXPOSURE
38-40, 42 ZOOM/ 38, 52, 38, 52, IC0501
4-6 JOYSTICK BLC/DISPLAY/VOL.
ZOOM MOTOR 16-18
IRIS 69 69, TL7030 SIDE
DRIVE PWM (KEY1) PG CN CN PG CASE-L
HALF_FV, 7004 7004 8012 8012
IRIS MOTOR 26 IRIS OPEN, 107 107 5 5 5 5
1
IC1303 SHUT_CTRL
2 PG8011
F DET
IC1302 SELECT 98 98 2 2 2 2 SWL3-H/SWL3
SELECT
CN8017 PG8017
6 1 48 48
FOCUS LED Q1303 F DET 105 105 4 4 4 4 1 1 QUIC
INV. F_DET MODE SW
E 68 68 E
ZOOM LED LCD_REV TL7028
FOCUS
LED (KEY2) PG7008 PG3401 PG3402
67 67 CS_LCD,
FOCUS SENSOR LCD_OPEN SCLK, SDO 5-7 19-21 6-8 IC3401 33-35 3-5
ZOOM FOCUS
SENS SENS SHOE_SCLK, SHOE_SDATA, SHOE_DET LCD PANEL
66 66 12, 14, LCD
ZOOM SENSOR 10, 12, 14 16 44-46 LCD_R, LCD_G,
DRIVER LCD_B
SYSTEM V_GYRO
TL0522 R_OUT, PG3403 PG1401 MR
PG1503 CONTROL G_OUT, IC3501 IC1402
5, 6
(REC) µP H_GYRO
75 75 B_OUT 8 18 LCD LCD_REV 1 1 REVERSE OPEN
ACCESS/PC IND.
ACCESSLE, REM_IN SW SW
PC-LED 76 76 19 7 LCD_OPEN 5 5
1
RECORD BUTTON WB_IR
LENS 15, 16, 15, 16, PG7009 PG0151
3 TALLY MV580A
UNIT ZOOM LEVER 106 106 24-26 24-26 PG0152
TL1543 ACCESSORY SHOE
7 (T/W)
DISC EJECT SHOE_SCLK,
TL1547 SHOE_SDATA,
(EJECT SW) CS_LENS
SHOE_DET SHE-H/SHE GYR-H/GYR
D SD, IC1401 D
REAR COVER MOVIE, CS_LCD PG0154 PG1401 IC1403
7 7 V_GYRO 17 17 2 2 V_MOVE
STILL CS_AUD
GYRO
PG1002 PG2001 CS_EVF 114 114 H_GYRO 19 19 4 4 DET IC1402
CS_LENS, CS_LCD, 29-31, CS_EVF, H_MOVE
DOORSW CS_AUD, CS_EVF,
MV550A SCLK, SDI, SDO
29-31, 39, 39, 77, SCLK, IC3701
77, 87, 101 87, 101 SDO 6-8 PG0153
40, 43, 4, 37, 4, 37,
45 38 38 6-8
CCD IC1505 IC1504 IC1507 21-23 21-23 53-55
EVF
13
IC2009 DRIVER EVF UNIT
IMAGE REAL TIME EVF_R, EVF_G,
SENSOR EEPROM OSD SDRAM IC2010 EVF_B
3, 4, CLOCK R_OUT,
G_OUT, TL3715
6-10 IC2006 B_OUT (EVF-G)
PG7003 PG IC1801
TL2082 MAGIC 1801
33 33 REM_IN 4 4 REMOTE
H1, H2, RG, (CCD-OUT) CONTROL
V1-V4 IC2003
R, G, B 20 20 WB_IR RECEIVER
CDS/AGC & D1801, Q1802
A/D CON CAMERA 34 34 TALLY
DSP Q1803
ENCODER & Y
TL2084(V1) D/A CONV IC6103 7 7 WB IR
C VIDEO/ADUIO RECEIVER
C MV580A TL2085(V2)
TL2086(V4) AMP C
TL2095(V3) Y
LD1801, Q1801
42 42 35 38 39 46 5 5
SEN-H IC2002 CLAMP REC INDI.
IC1001 Q1001 SENSOR MPEG2 SYSTEM VIDEO
BUF V-DRIVE CODEC MUX/DEMUX 44 44 31 50 PG1802
CCD 8 15 15 CLAMP 1, 10 1, 10 2, 5
IMAGE MIC
SENSOR IC2001 C 53
5, 6, 5, 6, 23, 12,
1-4, 8-12 8-12 SENSOR 24 16 FRT-H/
10-12 H-DRIVE ATAPI IF USB IF AUDIO LPF 62, FRT
H1, H2, RG, ACCELERATOR
59 60 64
V1-V4 TL2089(H2) CS_AUD,
TL2090(H1) SCLK,
DISC TL2091(RG) IC2004 MV580A SDI,
CHROMA SDO
DRIVE PG2301 PG2002
UNIT A/D CONV
85, 86 85, 86 AEL-H/AEL
PG2302
AUD_OUT
B DRF-H/ IC6001 B
EXT INPUT SW
DRF V_IN ACK0,
ACK1, IC6201
AUD_IN
ACK2 A/D & D/A CONV.
24-27
USB-H/USB IC5001 IC4106 MV580A
CN8101 PG5001 28, 91, 28, 91,
JK8101 USB2.0 SD IF 93 93 21-23
PC CONNECTION IF CONT CONT
FLASH SH SH µP 1, 2
MEMORY SDRAM 90 90 ADATAI 18
D/A
CONV
IC4002 9, 10 IC6101 5,
DISC COVER PG1502 MAIN CONTROL µP 89 89 ADATAO 20 A/D 5, 6 1,14 MIC 10
Y_IN
1-12
TL6006(AUD(L)) CONV 3, 4 AMP
CARD TL6009(AUD(R)) C_IN
INSERTION TL6010
BLOCK (VIDEO) EXTMIC_LCH, : REC VIDEO
MOVIE,
J6001 3, 4 57, 58 57, 58 EXTMIC_RCH TL6101(MIC_INL)
STILL TL6102(MIC_INR)
POWER 19, 20 EXT MIC JACK
SWITCH AUD_IO_L, : PB VIDEO
A 54, 55 54, 55 AUD_IO_R
A
DOOR 15 MAN-H/MAN 4, 5 70 70 C_OUT : EXT INPUT VIDEO
SWITCH DOORSW J6002 8
AV 72 72 V_OUT
2
16, 17 INPUT/OUTPUT
SPEAKER JACK 1 74 74 Y_OUT
TL1535(SP_OUT-)
TL1536(SP_OUT+)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B-1
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B-2 Disc Drive

F F

8cm DVD-RAM/DVD-R
DISC

SDRAM

SPINDLE DISC DRF-H/ MAN-H/MAN

MOTOR
AF TR DRIVE DRF

E
UNIT
E
LASER
DIODE

Encord Data
LASER DIODE IC2006
DRIVE MAGIC
DRIVE DSP PG2301 PG2002
APC (SERVO/DSP/
FRONT MONITOR ATAPI IF
ATAPI/
DET. & AMP PG2302
ENCODER/
DECODER)
D D
8 DETECTOR ANALOG DATA
& AMP FRONT END STROBE

4CH BRIDGE
DRIVE

SLIDER MOTOR
SPINDLE DRIVE
C C

M EJECT
MOTOR DRIVE

LOCK
UNIT
DISC COVER
SW FLASH ROM SRAM µP EEPROM
B B

DISC
SW

A A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B-2
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B-3 Power-1

F PG0501 PG1501 PG7001 20 AF+B

F
1-5 F0501 7 6 SYS3V 10 10 PG7002
IC1502 10 SYS3V
SYS3V FOR ADJUSTMENT
BATTERY 36 C3V
3
Q1302 C3V IC1301
TERMINAL 12,
8-12 AF5V 19
53-56 10
IC1503 IC1505 SW
AF+B 11
B/U_3V
37, FOCUS/
B/U3V 103 103 48 ZOOM/
LEN3V IRIS
REAR COVER 78, 79 78, 79 L6301 33
DRIVE
TL0510(C1.6V) 22
1.6V C3V
LEN5V 9
30
REG
L6303 34
FOCUS MOTOR/
IC2006 22, 30, IC6103
ZOOM LEVER/ PG1503 3V 36 PG ZOOM MOTOR/
E IC4002 IC4106 L6305 VIDEO/ E
RECORD 4 TL0511 81 81 61 IC1302 1301 IRIS MOTOR
BUTTON/ (C3V) AUDIO 8 6, 20
3V SP3V L6302 32 F DET MV580A
DISC EJECT 3V AMP
L6304 51, 54 C3V
14 5 5 IC1303
IC4003 IC4005 IC4006 L6306 MV550A
2 5 PG
3V F DET 1302
3V REG FOCUS MOTOR/
C5V 3, 14
13, 17, 18, 2 2 ZOOM MOTOR/
24, 27, 33, IC7001
LEN3V 8 IRIS MOTOR
POWER/ PG1502 8 40, 43, 44
11 IC1504 IC2009 IC2003 9 DECORDER
DOOR SW & IC1304
CARD INSERTION 3V 1, 3 3V LEN5V LENS UNIT
10,13,15, 5
BLOCK 19,25,31
24 REG
IC1507 IC2010 IC2004
D PG7009 PG0151 D
3V IC6201 CN0152 ACCESSORY SHOE
DISC MAN-H/ 3V C3V BL6201 13, 14 27, 28 27, 28 8
MAN 5 MV550A 14 SHOE_UNR MV580A
COVER IC5002 IC2011 BL6202 17 A/D & D/A BA1804
CONV. 30 30
10, 17, 32,
42, 51, 57, TL7041 EVF UNIT
1,3
IC2008
5 14
IC2001 62 (B/U_3V) PG0153 GYR-H/
3V IC5001 IC6101
10 10 19
EVF5V GYR
L6103 3 3 5
F0502 MV580A 82, 82, 4 VDD(8.5V) IC1401
83 83 MIC AMP
AF+B PG0154 CN1401 IC1403 3
20 20
V_MOVE
3V Q7001, Q7002 C3V 1 1 8 GYRO
3V REG TL0518(C15V) DET
C 3V 6 63 63 HOT SHOE IC1402 C
2, 5 6 -7V 2 SW SHE-H/ 3
IC0502 H_MOVE
IC2002 MV580A Q3701 SHE
80 80 C5V
MV550A 16, 20 EVF5V PG
0 ohm 15V SW 7008 PG3401
LENS TRANSFER MV580A 102 102 C8.5V 11 15
LCD PG3402
18 VDD
UNIT 8.5V
L7303 C8.5V
(8.5V)
12V IC3401
PG 119 119 LEN5V LCD PANEL
0 ohm
2001 C3V 16 10 L3402 18, 29
MV550A 24,
CCD 12V 1 24, 97 97 INV5V 3, 4 22, 23
IMAGE 5 9 17 L3403 36 LCD MR
INV5V IC3701
SENSOR DRIVER
-7V F0503 1, 3 39, 47 IC7002
IC1501 1 3V 5 21 5 L3401 43 IC3501
PG
B L3702 1, 49 EVF REG B
3403 2 REVERSE
C3V L3701 DRIVER 3, 4 SW
11, 12
TL0512(CAM5V) Q3451 IC3502
MV580A 5V 5V 3 BACK 1 OPEN/
SW IC6001 LIGHT SW
REG CLOSE SW
PG1001 TL3418(INV5V)
IC1001
TL0517(D2.5V)
7 15V 3 3
CCD PG2002 PG2031 PG2302 PG9701 AEL-H/
IMAGE 14 7 7 F0504 2.5V 28, 43 28, 43 28, 43 28, 43
SENSOR REG
2.5V AEL PG7003 PG1801 D1801, Q1802, Q1803
-7V TL0513(D3V) 8 8
25, 26 25, 26 25, 26 25, 26 WB IR RECEIVER FRT-H/
3V FRT
SEN-H TL0515(D5V) 30-33, 30-33, 30-33, 30-33,
5V IC1801
38-41 38-41 38-41 38-41
5V
A REG DRV-R C3V 3 3 2 REMOTE
17 CONTROL A
RECEIVER
23 DRF-H/ (Refer to POWER2)
27, 52,
IC0501 DRF
58, 59

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B-3
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B-4 Power-2

F F

PG2302 PG9701
30-33, 30-33, PG9301 PG9401 7, 22,
E 38-41 38-41 3, 4 3, 4 23 E
5V IC9301
5V

3V
25, 26 25, 26
3V
3V

5V 5
2.5V
28, 43 28, 43 IC9501 IC9502 IC9602 IC9007
SW
16, 17,
11, 23, 50, 32, 34,
73, 82 44, 49,
D 3 6, 8 64 4 8 D
57 IC9101 IC9503 IC9603 IC9201 IC9001 IC9353

1, 3,
14, 16,
30 5 5 17, 32 4 8 8
DRF-H/ IC8501 IC9506 IC9605 IC9302 IC9002 IC9354
DRF
(Refer to POWER1)
15, 16 8 5 4
IC9304 IC9601 IC9610 IC9005 IC9417
MOD
C C
8 5
PG9103 PG9001
IC9305 IC9006 42, 43, 42, 43,
46, 47 46, 47
5V
41 41
3V HDM
8 5V 11, 12 11, 12
IC9306 5V
SW

PG9702
EJECT 5, 6 EJECT LOCK
5V SW 5V
DRV-R UNIT
B B

A A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B-4
DZ-MV580A
DZ-MV580A(K) TK No. 0403E Digital Media Division,Tokai
DZ-MV550A Copyright © Hitachi, Ltd. 2004. All rights reserved. Printed in Japan (I)
DZ-MV550A(K)